mirror of
https://gitlab.freedesktop.org/xorg/lib/libx11.git
synced 2025-12-20 04:40:10 +01:00
trim trailing whitespace from manpages
Signed-off-by: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net>
This commit is contained in:
parent
4abf482d8e
commit
6f2cbcea5d
185 changed files with 2087 additions and 2077 deletions
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,34 +49,34 @@
|
|||
.SH NAME
|
||||
AllPlanes, BlackPixel, WhitePixel, ConnectionNumber, DefaultColormap, DefaultDepth, XListDepths, DefaultGC, DefaultRootWindow, DefaultScreenOfDisplay, DefaultScreen, DefaultVisual, DisplayCells, DisplayPlanes, DisplayString, XMaxRequestSize, XExtendedMaxRequestSize, LastKnownRequestProcessed, NextRequest, ProtocolVersion, ProtocolRevision, QLength, RootWindow, ScreenCount, ScreenOfDisplay, ServerVendor, VendorRelease \- Display macros and functions
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
unsigned long AllPlanes;
|
||||
unsigned long AllPlanes;
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
unsigned long BlackPixel\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \^\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
unsigned long WhitePixel\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \^\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned long WhitePixel\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \^\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int ConnectionNumber\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int ConnectionNumber\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Colormap DefaultColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^,
|
||||
\^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
\^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int DefaultDepth\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
int DefaultDepth\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int *XListDepths\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIscreen_number\fP, int
|
||||
\fIcount_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIcount_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
GC DefaultGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
GC DefaultGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Window DefaultRootWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
Window DefaultRootWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Screen *DefaultScreenOfDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
Screen *DefaultScreenOfDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int DefaultScreen\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int DefaultScreen\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Visual *DefaultVisual\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int
|
||||
\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int DisplayCells\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
int DisplayCells\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int DisplayPlanes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
|
|
@ -86,22 +86,22 @@ long XMaxRequestSize(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^)
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
long XExtendedMaxRequestSize(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^)
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
unsigned long LastKnownRequestProcessed\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned long LastKnownRequestProcessed\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
unsigned long NextRequest\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned long NextRequest\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int ProtocolVersion\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int ProtocolVersion\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int ProtocolRevision\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int ProtocolRevision\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int QLength\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int QLength\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Window RootWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
Window RootWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int ScreenCount\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int ScreenCount\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Screen *ScreenOfDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int
|
||||
\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *ServerVendor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^)
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
|
|
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Returns the number of depths.
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B AllPlanes
|
||||
macro returns a value with all bits set to 1 suitable for use in a plane
|
||||
macro returns a value with all bits set to 1 suitable for use in a plane
|
||||
argument to a procedure.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ specified screen.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XListDepths
|
||||
function returns the array of depths
|
||||
function returns the array of depths
|
||||
that are available on the specified screen.
|
||||
If the specified screen_number is valid and sufficient memory for the array
|
||||
can be allocated,
|
||||
|
|
@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ as necessary for the following functions:
|
|||
.BR XDrawSegments ,
|
||||
.BR XFillArcs ,
|
||||
.BR XFillRectangles ,
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR XPutImage .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -222,7 +222,8 @@ The Xlib functions
|
|||
and
|
||||
.B XSetRegion
|
||||
will use the extended-length encoding as necessary, if supported
|
||||
by the server. Use of the extended-length encoding in other Xlib
|
||||
by the server.
|
||||
Use of the extended-length encoding in other Xlib
|
||||
functions (for example,
|
||||
.BR XDrawPoints ,
|
||||
.BR XDrawRectangles ,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ int WidthOfScreen\^(\^Screen *\fIscreen\fP\^);
|
|||
int WidthMMOfScreen\^(\^Screen *\fIscreen\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIscreen\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the appropriate
|
||||
Specifies the appropriate
|
||||
.B Screen
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
|
@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ macro returns the default visual of the specified screen.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B DoesBackingStore
|
||||
macro returns
|
||||
macro returns
|
||||
.BR WhenMapped ,
|
||||
.BR NotUseful ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
|
@ -162,12 +162,12 @@ macro returns the height of the specified screen in millimeters.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B MaxCmapsOfScreen
|
||||
macro returns the maximum number of installed colormaps supported
|
||||
macro returns the maximum number of installed colormaps supported
|
||||
by the specified screen.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B MinCmapsOfScreen
|
||||
macro returns the minimum number of installed colormaps supported
|
||||
macro returns the minimum number of installed colormaps supported
|
||||
by the specified screen.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -46,8 +46,10 @@ file from the list in
|
|||
.PP
|
||||
Compose files can use an
|
||||
.RB \*q include \*q
|
||||
instruction. This allows local modifications to be made to existing compose
|
||||
files without including all of the content directly. For example, the
|
||||
instruction.
|
||||
This allows local modifications to be made to existing compose
|
||||
files without including all of the content directly.
|
||||
For example, the
|
||||
system's iso8859-1 compose file can be included with a line like this:
|
||||
.RS 4
|
||||
.BI "include \*q" %S/iso8859-1/Compose \*q
|
||||
|
|
@ -74,12 +76,15 @@ by using:
|
|||
.RS
|
||||
.B "include \*q%L\*q"
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
and then rewrite only the few rules that you need to change. New
|
||||
and then rewrite only the few rules that you need to change.
|
||||
New
|
||||
compose rules can be added, and previous ones replaced.
|
||||
.SH FILE FORMAT
|
||||
.\" Based on grammar description in modules/im/ximcp/imLcPrs.c
|
||||
Compose files are plain text files, with a separate line for each compose
|
||||
sequence. Comments begin with \fB#\fP characters. Each compose sequence
|
||||
sequence.
|
||||
Comments begin with \fB#\fP characters.
|
||||
Each compose sequence
|
||||
specifies one or more events and a resulting input sequence, with an optional
|
||||
comment at the end of the line:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
|
|
@ -97,7 +102,8 @@ it must match exactly.
|
|||
MODIFIER may be one of Ctrl, Lock, Caps, Shift, Alt or Meta.
|
||||
Each modifier may be preceded by a
|
||||
.RB \*q "~" \*q
|
||||
character to indicate that the modifier must not be present. If
|
||||
character to indicate that the modifier must not be present.
|
||||
If
|
||||
.RB \*q "None" \*q
|
||||
is specified, no modifier may be present.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
|
|
@ -110,18 +116,21 @@ as input when the sequence of events is input:
|
|||
Keysyms are specified without the \fBXK_\fP prefix.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Strings may be direct text encoded in the locale for which the compose file is
|
||||
to be used, or an escaped octal or hexadecimal character code. Octal codes
|
||||
to be used, or an escaped octal or hexadecimal character code.
|
||||
Octal codes
|
||||
are specified as \fB\*q\\123\*q\fP and hexadecimal codes as
|
||||
\fB\*q\\x3a\*q\fP.
|
||||
It is not necessary to specify in the right part of a rule a locale encoded
|
||||
string in addition to the keysym name. If the string is omitted, Xlib
|
||||
string in addition to the keysym name.
|
||||
If the string is omitted, Xlib
|
||||
figures it out from the keysym according to the current locale.
|
||||
I.e., if a rule looks like:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
\fB<dead_grave> <A> : \*q\\300\*q Agrave\fP
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
the result of the composition is always the letter with the "\\300"
|
||||
code. But if the rule is:
|
||||
code.
|
||||
But if the rule is:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
\fB<dead_grave> <A> : Agrave\fP
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,15 +50,15 @@
|
|||
DisplayOfCCC, VisualOfCCC, ScreenNumberOfCCC, ScreenWhitePointOfCCC, ClientWhitePointOfCCC \- Color Conversion Context macros
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Display *DisplayOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
Display *DisplayOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Visual *VisualOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
Visual *VisualOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int ScreenNumberOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
int ScreenNumberOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XcmsColor *ScreenWhitePointOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
XcmsColor *ScreenWhitePointOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XcmsColor *ClientWhitePointOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
XcmsColor *ClientWhitePointOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIccc\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the CCC.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ XY format (bitmap) or for each pixel value in Z format.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B BitmapBitOrder
|
||||
macro returns
|
||||
macro returns
|
||||
.B LSBFirst
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B MSBFirst
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B IsCursorKey
|
||||
macro returns
|
||||
macro returns
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
if the specified KeySym is a cursor key.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B IsFunctionKey
|
||||
macro returns
|
||||
macro returns
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
if the KeySym is a function key.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,18 +52,18 @@ XAddConnectionWatch, XRemoveConnectionWatch, XProcessInternalConnection, XIntern
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
typedef void (*XConnectionWatchProc)\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XPointer
|
||||
\fIclient_data\fP\^, int \fIfd\fP\^, Bool \fIopening\fP\^, XPointer
|
||||
*\fIwatch_data\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIwatch_data\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XAddConnectionWatch\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XWatchProc
|
||||
\fIprocedure\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIprocedure\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XRemoveConnectionWatch\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XWatchProc
|
||||
\fIprocedure\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIprocedure\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
void XProcessInternalConnection\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIfd\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XInternalConnectionNumbers\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int
|
||||
**\fIfd_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^);
|
||||
**\fIfd_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the additional client data.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Copyright \(co 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1994, 1996 X Consortium
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\" All rights reserved.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
|
||||
.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
|
||||
.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
|
||||
|
|
@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
|
|||
.\" copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
|
||||
.\" the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
|
||||
.\" permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
|
||||
.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
|
||||
.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
|
||||
|
|
@ -21,12 +21,12 @@
|
|||
.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
|
||||
.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
|
||||
.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
|
||||
.\" shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
|
||||
.\" or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
|
||||
.\" of the copyright holder.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\" X Window System is a trademark of The Open Group.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\" Copyright 2004 Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
|
||||
|
|
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -76,9 +76,9 @@
|
|||
XAddHost, XAddHosts, XListHosts, XRemoveHost, XRemoveHosts, XSetAccessControl, XEnableAccessControl, XDisableAccessControl, XHostAddress, XServerInterpretedAddress \- control host access and host control structure
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XAddHost\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XHostAddress *\fIhost\fP\^);
|
||||
int XAddHost\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XHostAddress *\fIhost\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XAddHosts\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XHostAddress *\fIhosts\fP,
|
||||
int XAddHosts\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XHostAddress *\fIhosts\fP,
|
||||
int \fInum_hosts\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XHostAddress *XListHosts\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int *\fInhosts_return\fP,
|
||||
|
|
@ -143,19 +143,19 @@ errors.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XListHosts
|
||||
function returns the current access control list as well as whether the use
|
||||
function returns the current access control list as well as whether the use
|
||||
of the list at connection setup was enabled or disabled.
|
||||
.B XListHosts
|
||||
allows a program to find out what machines can make connections.
|
||||
It also returns a pointer to a list of host structures that
|
||||
were allocated by the function.
|
||||
were allocated by the function.
|
||||
When no longer needed,
|
||||
this memory should be freed by calling
|
||||
.BR XFree .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XRemoveHost
|
||||
function removes the specified host from the access control list
|
||||
function removes the specified host from the access control list
|
||||
for that display.
|
||||
The server must be on the same host as the client process, or a
|
||||
.B BadAccess
|
||||
|
|
@ -173,12 +173,12 @@ errors.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XRemoveHosts
|
||||
function removes each specified host from the access control list for that
|
||||
display.
|
||||
function removes each specified host from the access control list for that
|
||||
display.
|
||||
The X server must be on the same host as the client process, or a
|
||||
.B BadAccess
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If you remove your machine from the access list,
|
||||
If you remove your machine from the access list,
|
||||
you can no longer connect to that server,
|
||||
and this operation cannot be reversed unless you reset the server.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ errors.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XSetAccessControl
|
||||
function either enables or disables the use of the access control list
|
||||
function either enables or disables the use of the access control list
|
||||
at each connection setup.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XSetAccessControl
|
||||
|
|
@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
} XHostAddress;
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The family member specifies which protocol address family to use
|
||||
The family member specifies which protocol address family to use
|
||||
(for example, TCP/IP or DECnet) and can be
|
||||
.BR FamilyInternet ,
|
||||
.BR FamilyInternet6 ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -242,8 +242,8 @@ or
|
|||
The length member specifies the length of the address in bytes.
|
||||
The address member specifies a pointer to the address.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For the ServerInterpreted family, the length is ignored and the address
|
||||
member is a pointer to a
|
||||
For the ServerInterpreted family, the length is ignored and the address
|
||||
member is a pointer to a
|
||||
.B XServerInterpretedAddress
|
||||
structure which contains:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Specifies the
|
|||
.B XClassHint
|
||||
structure that is to be used.
|
||||
.IP \fIclass_hints_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the
|
||||
Returns the
|
||||
.B XClassHint
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.IP \fIw\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ structure.
|
|||
Note that the pointer fields in the
|
||||
.B XClassHint
|
||||
structure are initially set to NULL.
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
.B XAllocClassHint
|
||||
returns NULL.
|
||||
To free the memory allocated to this structure,
|
||||
|
|
@ -132,15 +132,15 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
char *res_class;
|
||||
} XClassHint;
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The res_name member contains the application name,
|
||||
and the res_class member contains the application class.
|
||||
The res_name member contains the application name,
|
||||
and the res_class member contains the application class.
|
||||
Note that the name set in this property may differ from the name set as WM_NAME.
|
||||
That is, WM_NAME specifies what should be displayed in the title bar and,
|
||||
therefore, can contain temporal information (for example, the name of
|
||||
a file currently in an editor's buffer).
|
||||
On the other hand,
|
||||
On the other hand,
|
||||
the name specified as part of WM_CLASS is the formal name of the application
|
||||
that should be used when retrieving the application's resources from the
|
||||
that should be used when retrieving the application's resources from the
|
||||
resource database.
|
||||
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
.TP 1i
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ unsigned long *\fIgmask_return\fP\^, unsigned long *\fIbmask_return\fP\^);
|
|||
int XFreeColors\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^, unsigned
|
||||
long \fIpixels\fP\^[\^], int \fInpixels\fP\^, unsigned long \fIplanes\fP\^);
|
||||
.IP \fIcolor_name\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color
|
||||
Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color
|
||||
definition structure you want returned.
|
||||
.IP \fIcolormap\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the colormap.
|
||||
|
|
@ -84,13 +84,13 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
|||
.IP \fIexact_def_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the exact RGB values.
|
||||
.IP \fIncolors\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the number of pixel values that are to be returned in the
|
||||
pixels_return array.
|
||||
Specifies the number of pixel values that are to be returned in the
|
||||
pixels_return array.
|
||||
.IP \fInpixels\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the number of pixels.
|
||||
Specifies the number of pixels.
|
||||
.IP \fInplanes\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the number of plane masks that are to be returned in the plane masks
|
||||
array.
|
||||
Specifies the number of plane masks that are to be returned in the plane masks
|
||||
array.
|
||||
.IP \fInreds\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,11 +101,11 @@ array.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
Specify the number of red, green, and blue planes.
|
||||
The value you pass must be nonnegative.
|
||||
The value you pass must be nonnegative.
|
||||
.IP \fIpixels\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies an array of pixel values.
|
||||
Specifies an array of pixel values.
|
||||
.IP \fIpixels_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns an array of pixel values.
|
||||
Returns an array of pixel values.
|
||||
.IP \fIplane_mask_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns an array of plane masks.
|
||||
.\" *** JIM: NEED MORE INFO FOR THIS. ***
|
||||
|
|
@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ It returns both the exact database definition and
|
|||
the closest color supported by the screen.
|
||||
The allocated color cell is read-only.
|
||||
The pixel value is returned in screen_def_return.
|
||||
If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
|
||||
If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
|
||||
the result is implementation-dependent.
|
||||
Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
|
||||
If screen_def_return and exact_def_return
|
||||
|
|
@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ The number of colors must be positive and the number of planes nonnegative,
|
|||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If ncolors and nplanes are requested,
|
||||
If ncolors and nplanes are requested,
|
||||
then ncolors pixels
|
||||
and nplane plane masks are returned.
|
||||
No mask will have any bits set to 1 in common with
|
||||
|
|
@ -195,23 +195,23 @@ By ORing together each pixel with zero or more masks,
|
|||
ncolors * %2 sup nplanes% distinct pixels can be produced.
|
||||
All of these are
|
||||
allocated writable by the request.
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.B GrayScale
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR PseudoColor ,
|
||||
each mask has exactly one bit set to 1.
|
||||
For
|
||||
each mask has exactly one bit set to 1.
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR DirectColor ,
|
||||
each has exactly three bits set to 1.
|
||||
If contig is
|
||||
If contig is
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
and if all masks are ORed
|
||||
together, a single contiguous set of bits set to 1 will be formed for
|
||||
together, a single contiguous set of bits set to 1 will be formed for
|
||||
.B GrayScale
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B PseudoColor
|
||||
and three contiguous sets of bits set to 1 (one within each
|
||||
pixel subfield) for
|
||||
pixel subfield) for
|
||||
.BR DirectColor .
|
||||
The RGB values of the allocated
|
||||
entries are undefined.
|
||||
|
|
@ -228,41 +228,41 @@ errors.
|
|||
.EQ
|
||||
delim %%
|
||||
.EN
|
||||
The specified ncolors must be positive;
|
||||
The specified ncolors must be positive;
|
||||
and nreds, ngreens, and nblues must be nonnegative,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If ncolors colors, nreds reds, ngreens greens, and nblues blues are requested,
|
||||
ncolors pixels are returned; and the masks have nreds, ngreens, and
|
||||
If ncolors colors, nreds reds, ngreens greens, and nblues blues are requested,
|
||||
ncolors pixels are returned; and the masks have nreds, ngreens, and
|
||||
nblues bits set to 1, respectively.
|
||||
If contig is
|
||||
If contig is
|
||||
.BR True ,
|
||||
each mask will have
|
||||
a contiguous set of bits set to 1.
|
||||
No mask will have any bits set to 1 in common with
|
||||
any other mask or with any of the pixels.
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR DirectColor ,
|
||||
each mask
|
||||
will lie within the corresponding pixel subfield.
|
||||
By ORing together
|
||||
subsets of masks with each pixel value,
|
||||
ncolors * %2 sup (nreds+ngreens+nblues)% distinct pixel values can be produced.
|
||||
subsets of masks with each pixel value,
|
||||
ncolors * %2 sup (nreds+ngreens+nblues)% distinct pixel values can be produced.
|
||||
All of these are allocated by the request.
|
||||
However, in the
|
||||
colormap, there are only ncolors * %2 sup nreds% independent red entries,
|
||||
ncolors * %2 sup ngreens% independent green entries,
|
||||
and ncolors * %2 sup nblues% independent blue entries.
|
||||
This is true even for
|
||||
colormap, there are only ncolors * %2 sup nreds% independent red entries,
|
||||
ncolors * %2 sup ngreens% independent green entries,
|
||||
and ncolors * %2 sup nblues% independent blue entries.
|
||||
This is true even for
|
||||
.BR PseudoColor .
|
||||
When the colormap entry of a pixel
|
||||
value is changed (using
|
||||
value is changed (using
|
||||
.BR XStoreColors ,
|
||||
.BR XStoreColor ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR XStoreNamedColor ),
|
||||
the pixel is decomposed according to the masks,
|
||||
the pixel is decomposed according to the masks,
|
||||
and the corresponding independent entries are updated.
|
||||
.B XAllocColorPlanes
|
||||
returns nonzero if it succeeded or zero if it failed.
|
||||
|
|
@ -279,11 +279,11 @@ The
|
|||
function frees the cells represented by pixels whose values are in the
|
||||
pixels array.
|
||||
The planes argument should not have any bits set to 1 in common with any of the
|
||||
pixels.
|
||||
pixels.
|
||||
The set of all pixels is produced by ORing together subsets of
|
||||
the planes argument with the pixels.
|
||||
The request frees all of these pixels that
|
||||
were allocated by the client (using
|
||||
were allocated by the client (using
|
||||
.IN XAllocColor
|
||||
.IN XAllocNamedColor
|
||||
.IN XAllocColorCells
|
||||
|
|
@ -291,10 +291,10 @@ were allocated by the client (using
|
|||
.BR XAllocColor ,
|
||||
.BR XAllocNamedColor ,
|
||||
.BR XAllocColorCells ,
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR XAllocColorPlanes ).
|
||||
Note that freeing an
|
||||
individual pixel obtained from
|
||||
individual pixel obtained from
|
||||
.B XAllocColorPlanes
|
||||
may not actually allow
|
||||
it to be reused until all of its related pixels are also freed.
|
||||
|
|
@ -304,8 +304,8 @@ and if a client allocates the same read-only entry multiple times,
|
|||
it must free the entry that many times before the entry is actually freed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
All specified pixels that are allocated by the client in the colormap are
|
||||
freed, even if one or more pixels produce an error.
|
||||
If a specified pixel is not a valid index into the colormap, a
|
||||
freed, even if one or more pixels produce an error.
|
||||
If a specified pixel is not a valid index into the colormap, a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If a specified pixel is not allocated by the
|
||||
|
|
@ -316,8 +316,8 @@ to
|
|||
.BR XCreateColormap ),
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadAccess
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If more than one pixel is in error,
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If more than one pixel is in error,
|
||||
the one that gets reported is arbitrary.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XFreeColors
|
||||
|
|
@ -346,8 +346,8 @@ Unless a specific range is specified for an argument, the full range defined
|
|||
by the argument's type is accepted. Any argument defined as a set of
|
||||
alternatives can generate this error.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
XCreateColormap(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XCreateColormap(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XQueryColor(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XStoreColors(__libmansuffix__)
|
||||
XStoreColors(__libmansuffix__)
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI\*(xL\fP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ structure.
|
|||
Note that all fields in the
|
||||
.B XIconSize
|
||||
structure are initially set to zero.
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
.B XAllocIconSize
|
||||
returns NULL.
|
||||
To free the memory allocated to this structure,
|
||||
|
|
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ error.
|
|||
\s-1WM_ICON_SIZES\s+1
|
||||
The window manager may set this property on the root window to
|
||||
specify the icon sizes it supports.
|
||||
The C type of this property is
|
||||
The C type of this property is
|
||||
.BR XIconSize .
|
||||
.SH STRUCTURES
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,11 +40,11 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
.ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface, \fRO'Reilly and Associates,
|
||||
.ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface, \fRO'Reilly and Associates,
|
||||
.ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
|
||||
'\" t
|
||||
.TH XAllocSizeHints __libmansuffix__ __xorgversion__ "XLIB FUNCTIONS"
|
||||
|
|
@ -90,16 +90,16 @@ structure.
|
|||
Note that all fields in the
|
||||
.B XSizeHints
|
||||
structure are initially set to zero.
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
.B XAllocSizeHints
|
||||
returns NULL.
|
||||
To free the memory allocated to this structure,
|
||||
use
|
||||
.BR XFree .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XSetWMNormalHints
|
||||
function replaces the size hints for the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property
|
||||
function replaces the size hints for the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property
|
||||
on the specified window.
|
||||
If the property does not already exist,
|
||||
.B XSetWMNormalHints
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,24 +113,24 @@ and
|
|||
.B BadWindow
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XGetWMNormalHints
|
||||
function returns the size hints stored in the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property
|
||||
function returns the size hints stored in the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property
|
||||
on the specified window.
|
||||
If the property is of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, is of format 32,
|
||||
and is long enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM)
|
||||
or new size hints structure,
|
||||
and is long enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM)
|
||||
or new size hints structure,
|
||||
.B XGetWMNormalHints
|
||||
sets the various fields of the
|
||||
sets the various fields of the
|
||||
.B XSizeHints
|
||||
structure, sets the supplied_return argument to the list of fields
|
||||
structure, sets the supplied_return argument to the list of fields
|
||||
that were supplied by the user (whether or not they contained defined values),
|
||||
and returns a nonzero status.
|
||||
Otherwise, it returns a zero status.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B XGetWMNormalHints
|
||||
returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size hints property is read,
|
||||
returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size hints property is read,
|
||||
the supplied_return argument will contain the following bits:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
|
|
@ -138,8 +138,8 @@ the supplied_return argument will contain the following bits:
|
|||
PMaxSize|PResizeInc|PAspect)
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the property is large enough to contain the base size
|
||||
and window gravity fields as well,
|
||||
If the property is large enough to contain the base size
|
||||
and window gravity fields as well,
|
||||
the supplied_return argument will also contain the following bits:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
|
|
@ -151,17 +151,17 @@ can generate a
|
|||
PN BadWindow
|
||||
error.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XSetWMSizeHints
|
||||
function replaces the size hints for the specified property
|
||||
function replaces the size hints for the specified property
|
||||
on the named window.
|
||||
If the specified property does not already exist,
|
||||
.B XSetWMSizeHints
|
||||
sets the size hints for the specified property
|
||||
on the named window.
|
||||
The property is stored with a type of WM_SIZE_HINTS and a format of 32.
|
||||
To set a window's normal size hints,
|
||||
you can use the
|
||||
To set a window's normal size hints,
|
||||
you can use the
|
||||
.B XSetWMNormalHints
|
||||
function.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -173,29 +173,29 @@ and
|
|||
.B BadWindow
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XGetWMSizeHints
|
||||
function returns the size hints stored in the specified property
|
||||
function returns the size hints stored in the specified property
|
||||
on the named window.
|
||||
If the property is of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, is of format 32,
|
||||
and is long enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM)
|
||||
or new size hints structure,
|
||||
If the property is of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, is of format 32,
|
||||
and is long enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM)
|
||||
or new size hints structure,
|
||||
.B XGetWMSizeHints
|
||||
sets the various fields of the
|
||||
sets the various fields of the
|
||||
.B XSizeHints
|
||||
structure, sets the supplied_return argument to the
|
||||
list of fields that were supplied by the user
|
||||
(whether or not they contained defined values),
|
||||
list of fields that were supplied by the user
|
||||
(whether or not they contained defined values),
|
||||
and returns a nonzero status.
|
||||
Otherwise, it returns a zero status.
|
||||
To get a window's normal size hints,
|
||||
you can use the
|
||||
To get a window's normal size hints,
|
||||
you can use the
|
||||
.B XGetWMNormalHints
|
||||
function.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B XGetWMSizeHints
|
||||
returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size hints property is read,
|
||||
returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size hints property is read,
|
||||
the supplied_return argument will contain the following bits:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
|
|
@ -203,8 +203,8 @@ the supplied_return argument will contain the following bits:
|
|||
PMaxSize|PResizeInc|PAspect)
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the property is large enough to contain the base size
|
||||
and window gravity fields as well,
|
||||
If the property is large enough to contain the base size
|
||||
and window gravity fields as well,
|
||||
the supplied_return argument will also contain the following bits:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
|
|
@ -359,19 +359,19 @@ The max_width and max_height members specify the maximum window size.
|
|||
The width_inc and height_inc members define an arithmetic progression of
|
||||
sizes (minimum to maximum) into which the window prefers to be resized.
|
||||
The min_aspect and max_aspect members are expressed
|
||||
as ratios of x and y,
|
||||
as ratios of x and y,
|
||||
and they allow an application to specify the range of aspect
|
||||
ratios it prefers.
|
||||
The base_width and base_height members define the desired size of the window.
|
||||
The window manager will interpret the position of the window
|
||||
and its border width to position the point of the outer rectangle
|
||||
The window manager will interpret the position of the window
|
||||
and its border width to position the point of the outer rectangle
|
||||
of the overall window specified by the win_gravity member.
|
||||
The outer rectangle of the window includes any borders or decorations
|
||||
supplied by the window manager.
|
||||
In other words,
|
||||
if the window manager decides to place the window where the client asked,
|
||||
the position on the parent window's border named by the win_gravity
|
||||
will be placed where the client window would have been placed
|
||||
the position on the parent window's border named by the win_gravity
|
||||
will be placed where the client window would have been placed
|
||||
in the absence of a window manager.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Note that use of the
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -87,16 +87,16 @@ structure.
|
|||
Note that all fields in the
|
||||
.B XStandardColormap
|
||||
structure are initially set to zero.
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
.B XAllocStandardColormap
|
||||
returns NULL.
|
||||
To free the memory allocated to this structure,
|
||||
use
|
||||
.BR XFree .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XSetRGBColormaps
|
||||
function replaces the RGB colormap definition in the specified property
|
||||
function replaces the RGB colormap definition in the specified property
|
||||
on the named window.
|
||||
If the property does not already exist,
|
||||
.B XSetRGBColormaps
|
||||
|
|
@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ restriction that only RGB_DEFAULT_MAP contain more than one definition.
|
|||
The
|
||||
.B XSetRGBColormaps
|
||||
function usually is only used by window or session managers.
|
||||
To create a standard colormap,
|
||||
To create a standard colormap,
|
||||
follow this procedure:
|
||||
.IP 1. 5
|
||||
Open a new connection to the same server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -128,11 +128,11 @@ Determine the color characteristics of the visual.
|
|||
Allocate cells in the colormap (or create it with
|
||||
.BR AllocAll ).
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
Call
|
||||
Call
|
||||
.B XStoreColors
|
||||
to store appropriate color values in the colormap.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
Fill in the descriptive members in the
|
||||
Fill in the descriptive members in the
|
||||
.B XStandardColormap
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
|
|
@ -153,23 +153,23 @@ and
|
|||
.B BadWindow
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XGetRGBColormaps
|
||||
function returns the RGB colormap definitions stored
|
||||
function returns the RGB colormap definitions stored
|
||||
in the specified property on the named window.
|
||||
If the property exists, is of type RGB_COLOR_MAP, is of format 32,
|
||||
If the property exists, is of type RGB_COLOR_MAP, is of format 32,
|
||||
and is long enough to contain a colormap definition,
|
||||
.B XGetRGBColormaps
|
||||
allocates and fills in space for the returned colormaps
|
||||
and returns a nonzero status.
|
||||
If the visualid is not present,
|
||||
If the visualid is not present,
|
||||
.B XGetRGBColormaps
|
||||
assumes the default visual for the screen on which the window is located;
|
||||
if the killid is not present,
|
||||
assumes the default visual for the screen on which the window is located;
|
||||
if the killid is not present,
|
||||
.B None
|
||||
is assumed, which indicates that the resources cannot be released.
|
||||
Otherwise,
|
||||
none of the fields are set, and
|
||||
Otherwise,
|
||||
none of the fields are set, and
|
||||
.B XGetRGBColormaps
|
||||
returns a zero status.
|
||||
Note that it is the caller's responsibility to honor the ICCCM
|
||||
|
|
@ -218,30 +218,30 @@ The colormap member is the colormap created by the
|
|||
.B XCreateColormap
|
||||
function.
|
||||
The red_max, green_max, and blue_max members give the maximum
|
||||
red, green, and blue values, respectively.
|
||||
Each color coefficient ranges from zero to its max, inclusive.
|
||||
red, green, and blue values, respectively.
|
||||
Each color coefficient ranges from zero to its max, inclusive.
|
||||
For example,
|
||||
a common colormap allocation is 3/3/2 (3 planes for red, 3
|
||||
planes for green, and 2 planes for blue).
|
||||
This colormap would have red_max = 7, green_max = 7,
|
||||
and blue_max = 3.
|
||||
An alternate allocation that uses only 216 colors is red_max = 5,
|
||||
planes for green, and 2 planes for blue).
|
||||
This colormap would have red_max = 7, green_max = 7,
|
||||
and blue_max = 3.
|
||||
An alternate allocation that uses only 216 colors is red_max = 5,
|
||||
green_max = 5, and blue_max = 5.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The red_mult, green_mult, and blue_mult members give the
|
||||
scale factors used to compose a full pixel value.
|
||||
scale factors used to compose a full pixel value.
|
||||
(See the discussion of the base_pixel members for further information.)
|
||||
For a 3/3/2 allocation, red_mult might be 32,
|
||||
green_mult might be 4, and blue_mult might be 1.
|
||||
For a 6-colors-each allocation, red_mult might be 36,
|
||||
green_mult might be 4, and blue_mult might be 1.
|
||||
For a 6-colors-each allocation, red_mult might be 36,
|
||||
green_mult might be 6, and blue_mult might be 1.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The base_pixel member gives the base pixel value used to
|
||||
compose a full pixel value.
|
||||
Usually, the base_pixel is obtained from a call to the
|
||||
compose a full pixel value.
|
||||
Usually, the base_pixel is obtained from a call to the
|
||||
.B XAllocColorPlanes
|
||||
function.
|
||||
Given integer red, green, and blue coefficients in their appropriate
|
||||
function.
|
||||
Given integer red, green, and blue coefficients in their appropriate
|
||||
ranges, one then can compute a corresponding pixel value by
|
||||
using the following expression:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -249,13 +249,13 @@ using the following expression:
|
|||
(r * red_mult + g * green_mult + b * blue_mult + base_pixel) & 0xFFFFFFFF
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.B GrayScale
|
||||
colormaps,
|
||||
only the colormap, red_max, red_mult,
|
||||
and base_pixel members are defined.
|
||||
The other members are ignored.
|
||||
To compute a
|
||||
colormaps,
|
||||
only the colormap, red_max, red_mult,
|
||||
and base_pixel members are defined.
|
||||
The other members are ignored.
|
||||
To compute a
|
||||
.B GrayScale
|
||||
pixel value, use the following expression:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -274,15 +274,15 @@ depending on the size of the integer type used to do the computation,
|
|||
The visualid member gives the ID number of the visual from which the
|
||||
colormap was created.
|
||||
The killid member gives a resource ID that indicates whether
|
||||
the cells held by this standard colormap are to be released
|
||||
the cells held by this standard colormap are to be released
|
||||
by freeing the colormap ID or by calling the
|
||||
.B XKillClient
|
||||
function on the indicated resource.
|
||||
(Note that this method is necessary for allocating out of an existing colormap.)
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The properties containing the
|
||||
The properties containing the
|
||||
.B XStandardColormap
|
||||
information have
|
||||
information have
|
||||
the type RGB_COLOR_MAP.
|
||||
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
.TP 1i
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,11 +40,11 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
.ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface, \fRO'Reilly and Associates, Sebastopol, 1991.
|
||||
.ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface, \fRO'Reilly and Associates, Sebastopol, 1991.
|
||||
.ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
|
||||
'\" t
|
||||
.TH XAllocWMHints __libmansuffix__ __xorgversion__ "XLIB FUNCTIONS"
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
|
|||
XAllocWMHints, XSetWMHints, XGetWMHints, XWMHints \- allocate window manager hints structure and set or read a window's WM_HINTS property
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XWMHints *XAllocWMHints\^(void\^);
|
||||
XWMHints *XAllocWMHints\^(void\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XSetWMHints\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, Window \fIw\fP, XWMHints *\fIwmhints\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
|
|
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
|||
.IP \fIw\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the window.
|
||||
.IP \fIwmhints\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
.B XWMHints
|
||||
structure to be used.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ structure.
|
|||
Note that all fields in the
|
||||
.B XWMHints
|
||||
structure are initially set to zero.
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
If insufficient memory is available,
|
||||
.B XAllocWMHints
|
||||
returns NULL.
|
||||
To free the memory allocated to this structure,
|
||||
|
|
@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ errors.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XGetWMHints
|
||||
function reads the window manager hints and
|
||||
returns NULL if no WM_HINTS property was set on the window
|
||||
or returns a pointer to a
|
||||
function reads the window manager hints and
|
||||
returns NULL if no WM_HINTS property was set on the window
|
||||
or returns a pointer to a
|
||||
.B XWMHints
|
||||
structure if it succeeds.
|
||||
When finished with the data,
|
||||
|
|
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ error.
|
|||
.TP 1i
|
||||
\s-1WM_HINTS\s+1
|
||||
Additional hints set by the client for use by the window manager.
|
||||
The C type of this property is
|
||||
The C type of this property is
|
||||
.BR XWMHints .
|
||||
.SH STRUCTURES
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -212,33 +212,33 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The input member is used to communicate to the window manager the input focus
|
||||
model used by the application.
|
||||
Applications that expect input but never explicitly set focus to any
|
||||
of their subwindows (that is, use the push model of focus management),
|
||||
Applications that expect input but never explicitly set focus to any
|
||||
of their subwindows (that is, use the push model of focus management),
|
||||
such as X Version 10 style applications that use real-estate
|
||||
driven focus, should set this member to
|
||||
driven focus, should set this member to
|
||||
.BR True .
|
||||
Similarly, applications
|
||||
that set input focus to their subwindows only when it is given to their
|
||||
top-level window by a window manager should also set this member to
|
||||
top-level window by a window manager should also set this member to
|
||||
.BR True .
|
||||
Applications that manage their own input focus by explicitly setting
|
||||
focus to one of their subwindows whenever they want keyboard input
|
||||
(that is, use the pull model of focus management) should set this member to
|
||||
focus to one of their subwindows whenever they want keyboard input
|
||||
(that is, use the pull model of focus management) should set this member to
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
Applications that never expect any keyboard input also should set this member
|
||||
to
|
||||
to
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Pull model window managers should make it possible for push model
|
||||
applications to get input by setting input focus to the top-level windows of
|
||||
applications whose input member is
|
||||
applications whose input member is
|
||||
.BR True .
|
||||
Push model window managers should
|
||||
make sure that pull model applications do not break them
|
||||
by resetting input focus to
|
||||
make sure that pull model applications do not break them
|
||||
by resetting input focus to
|
||||
.B PointerRoot
|
||||
when it is appropriate (for example, whenever an application whose
|
||||
input member is
|
||||
input member is
|
||||
.B False
|
||||
sets input focus to one of its subwindows).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -273,14 +273,14 @@ T} T{
|
|||
T}
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
The icon_mask specifies which pixels of the icon_pixmap should be used as the
|
||||
icon.
|
||||
icon.
|
||||
This allows for nonrectangular icons.
|
||||
Both icon_pixmap and icon_mask must be bitmaps.
|
||||
The icon_window lets an application provide a window for use as an icon
|
||||
for window managers that support such use.
|
||||
The window_group lets you specify that this window belongs to a group
|
||||
of other windows.
|
||||
For example, if a single application manipulates multiple
|
||||
For example, if a single application manipulates multiple
|
||||
top-level windows, this allows you to provide enough
|
||||
information that a window manager can iconify all of the windows
|
||||
rather than just the one window.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ XAllowEvents \- release queued events
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XAllowEvents\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIevent_mode\fP\^,
|
||||
Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIevent_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the event mode.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.BR AsyncPointer ,
|
||||
.BR SyncPointer ,
|
||||
.BR AsyncKeyboard ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ You can pass either a timestamp or
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XAllowEvents
|
||||
function releases some queued events if the client has caused a device
|
||||
function releases some queued events if the client has caused a device
|
||||
to freeze.
|
||||
It has no effect if the specified time is earlier than the last-grab
|
||||
time of the most recent active grab for the client or if the specified time
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
|
|||
.SH NAME
|
||||
XAnyEvent, XEvent \- generic X event structures
|
||||
.SH STRUCTURES
|
||||
All the event structures declared in
|
||||
All the event structures declared in
|
||||
.Pn < X11/Xlib.h >
|
||||
have the following common members:
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -142,14 +142,14 @@ dispatchers.
|
|||
These structures have the following common members:
|
||||
window, root, subwindow, time, x, y, x_root, y_root, state, and same_screen.
|
||||
The window member is set to the window on which the
|
||||
event was generated and is referred to as the event window.
|
||||
event was generated and is referred to as the event window.
|
||||
As long as the conditions previously discussed are met,
|
||||
this is the window used by the X server to report the event.
|
||||
The root member is set to the source window's root window.
|
||||
The x_root and y_root members are set to the pointer's coordinates
|
||||
relative to the root window's origin at the time of the event.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The same_screen member is set to indicate whether the event
|
||||
The same_screen member is set to indicate whether the event
|
||||
window is on the same screen
|
||||
as the root window and can be either
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
|
|
@ -162,21 +162,21 @@ If
|
|||
.BR False ,
|
||||
the event and root windows are not on the same screen.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the source window is an inferior of the event window,
|
||||
If the source window is an inferior of the event window,
|
||||
the subwindow member of the structure is set to the child of the event window
|
||||
that is the source window or the child of the event window that is
|
||||
an ancestor of the source window.
|
||||
Otherwise, the X server sets the subwindow member to
|
||||
.BR None .
|
||||
The time member is set to the time when the event was generated
|
||||
The time member is set to the time when the event was generated
|
||||
and is expressed in milliseconds.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the event window is on the same screen as the root window,
|
||||
If the event window is on the same screen as the root window,
|
||||
the x and y members
|
||||
are set to the coordinates relative to the event window's origin.
|
||||
Otherwise, these members are set to zero.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The state member is set to indicate the logical state of the pointer buttons
|
||||
The state member is set to indicate the logical state of the pointer buttons
|
||||
and modifier keys just prior to the event,
|
||||
which is the bitwise inclusive OR of one or more of the
|
||||
button or modifier key masks:
|
||||
|
|
@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ value.
|
|||
For the
|
||||
.B XPointerMovedEvent
|
||||
structure, this member is called is_hint.
|
||||
It can be set to
|
||||
It can be set to
|
||||
.B NotifyNormal
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR NotifyHint .
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,18 +53,18 @@ XChangeKeyboardControl, XGetKeyboardControl, XAutoRepeatOn, XAutoRepeatOff, XBel
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XChangeKeyboardControl\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, unsigned long
|
||||
\fIvalue_mask\fP\^, XKeyboardControl *\fIvalues\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIvalue_mask\fP\^, XKeyboardControl *\fIvalues\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XGetKeyboardControl\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XKeyboardState
|
||||
*\fIvalues_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIvalues_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XAutoRepeatOn\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int XAutoRepeatOn\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XAutoRepeatOff\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int XAutoRepeatOff\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XBell\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIpercent\fP\^);
|
||||
int XBell\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIpercent\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XQueryKeymap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, char \fIkeys_return\fP[32]\^);
|
||||
int XQueryKeymap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, char \fIkeys_return\fP[32]\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Returns an array of bytes that identifies which keys are pressed down.
|
|||
Each bit represents one key of the keyboard.
|
||||
.IP \fIpercent\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the volume for the bell,
|
||||
which can range from \-100 to 100 inclusive.
|
||||
which can range from \-100 to 100 inclusive.
|
||||
.IP \fIvalue_mask\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies which controls to change.
|
||||
This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid control mask bits.
|
||||
|
|
@ -140,11 +140,11 @@ error.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XQueryKeymap
|
||||
function returns a bit vector for the logical state of the keyboard,
|
||||
where each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding key is currently
|
||||
function returns a bit vector for the logical state of the keyboard,
|
||||
where each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding key is currently
|
||||
pressed down.
|
||||
The vector is represented as 32 bytes.
|
||||
Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
|
||||
Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
|
||||
with the least significant bit in the byte representing key 8N.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Note that the logical state of a device (as seen by client applications)
|
||||
|
|
@ -227,20 +227,20 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
int led;
|
||||
int led_mode; /\&* LedModeOn, LedModeOff */
|
||||
int key;
|
||||
int auto_repeat_mode; /\&* AutoRepeatModeOff, AutoRepeatModeOn,
|
||||
int auto_repeat_mode; /\&* AutoRepeatModeOff, AutoRepeatModeOn,
|
||||
AutoRepeatModeDefault */
|
||||
} XKeyboardControl;
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The key_click_percent member sets the volume for key clicks between 0 (off)
|
||||
and 100 (loud) inclusive, if possible.
|
||||
The key_click_percent member sets the volume for key clicks between 0 (off)
|
||||
and 100 (loud) inclusive, if possible.
|
||||
A setting of \-1 restores the default.
|
||||
Other negative values generate a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The bell_percent sets the base volume for the bell between 0 (off) and 100
|
||||
(loud) inclusive, if possible.
|
||||
(loud) inclusive, if possible.
|
||||
A setting of \-1 restores the default.
|
||||
Other negative values generate a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
|
|
@ -251,27 +251,27 @@ Other negative values generate a
|
|||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error.
|
||||
The bell_duration member sets the duration of the
|
||||
bell specified in milliseconds, if possible.
|
||||
bell specified in milliseconds, if possible.
|
||||
A setting of \-1 restores the default.
|
||||
Other negative values generate a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If both the led_mode and led members are specified,
|
||||
the state of that LED is changed, if possible.
|
||||
the state of that LED is changed, if possible.
|
||||
The led_mode member can be set to
|
||||
.B LedModeOn
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR LedModeOff .
|
||||
If only led_mode is specified, the state of
|
||||
all LEDs are changed, if possible.
|
||||
At most 32 LEDs numbered from one are supported.
|
||||
all LEDs are changed, if possible.
|
||||
At most 32 LEDs numbered from one are supported.
|
||||
No standard interpretation of LEDs is defined.
|
||||
If led is specified without led_mode, a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If both the auto_repeat_mode and key members are specified,
|
||||
If both the auto_repeat_mode and key members are specified,
|
||||
the auto_repeat_mode of that key is changed (according to
|
||||
.BR AutoRepeatModeOn ,
|
||||
.BR AutoRepeatModeOff ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
} XKeyboardState;
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For the LEDs,
|
||||
For the LEDs,
|
||||
the least significant bit of led_mask corresponds to LED one,
|
||||
and each bit set to 1 in led_mask indicates an LED that is lit.
|
||||
The global_auto_repeat member can be set to
|
||||
|
|
@ -327,9 +327,9 @@ The global_auto_repeat member can be set to
|
|||
or
|
||||
.BR AutoRepeatModeOff .
|
||||
The auto_repeats member is a bit vector.
|
||||
Each bit set to 1 indicates that auto-repeat is enabled
|
||||
Each bit set to 1 indicates that auto-repeat is enabled
|
||||
for the corresponding key.
|
||||
The vector is represented as 32 bytes.
|
||||
The vector is represented as 32 bytes.
|
||||
Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
|
||||
with the least significant bit in the byte representing key 8N.
|
||||
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,29 +51,29 @@ XChangeKeyboardMapping, XGetKeyboardMapping, XDisplayKeycodes, XSetModifierMappi
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XChangeKeyboardMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIfirst_keycode\fP,
|
||||
int \fIkeysyms_per_keycode\fP, KeySym *\fIkeysyms\fP, int \fInum_codes\fP\^);
|
||||
int \fIkeysyms_per_keycode\fP, KeySym *\fIkeysyms\fP, int \fInum_codes\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
KeySym *XGetKeyboardMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, KeyCode
|
||||
\fIfirst_keycode\fP, int \fIkeycode_count\fP, int
|
||||
*\fIkeysyms_per_keycode_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIkeysyms_per_keycode_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDisplayKeycodes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int
|
||||
*\fImin_keycodes_return\fP\^, int *\fImax_keycodes_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fImin_keycodes_return\fP\^, int *\fImax_keycodes_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XSetModifierMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XModifierKeymap
|
||||
*\fImodmap\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fImodmap\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XModifierKeymap *XGetModifierMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
XModifierKeymap *XGetModifierMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XModifierKeymap *XNewModifiermap(\^int \fImax_keys_per_mod\fP\^);
|
||||
XModifierKeymap *XNewModifiermap(\^int \fImax_keys_per_mod\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XModifierKeymap *XInsertModifiermapEntry\^(\^XModifierKeymap *\fImodmap\fP,
|
||||
KeyCode \fIkeycode_entry\fP, int \fImodifier\fP\^);
|
||||
KeyCode \fIkeycode_entry\fP, int \fImodifier\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XModifierKeymap *XDeleteModifiermapEntry\^(\^XModifierKeymap *\fImodmap\fP,
|
||||
KeyCode \fIkeycode_entry\fP, int \fImodifier\fP\^);
|
||||
KeyCode \fIkeycode_entry\fP, int \fImodifier\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFreeModifiermap(\^XModifierKeymap *\fImodmap\fP\^);
|
||||
int XFreeModifiermap(\^XModifierKeymap *\fImodmap\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Specifies the first KeyCode that is to be changed or returned.
|
|||
.IP \fIkeycode_count\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the number of KeyCodes that are to be returned.
|
||||
.IP \fIkeycode_entry\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the KeyCode.
|
||||
Specifies the KeyCode.
|
||||
.IP \fIkeysyms\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies an array of KeySyms.
|
||||
.IP \fIkeysyms_per_keycode\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Returns the minimum number of KeyCodes.
|
|||
.IP \fImodifier\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the modifier.
|
||||
.IP \fImodmap\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
.B XModifierKeymap
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.IP \fInum_codes\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -109,20 +109,20 @@ The
|
|||
.B XChangeKeyboardMapping
|
||||
function defines the symbols for the specified number of KeyCodes
|
||||
starting with first_keycode.
|
||||
The symbols for KeyCodes outside this range remain unchanged.
|
||||
The symbols for KeyCodes outside this range remain unchanged.
|
||||
The number of elements in keysyms must be:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
num_codes * keysyms_per_keycode
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The specified first_keycode must be greater than or equal to min_keycode
|
||||
The specified first_keycode must be greater than or equal to min_keycode
|
||||
returned by
|
||||
.BR XDisplayKeycodes ,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
In addition, the following expression must be less than or equal to
|
||||
In addition, the following expression must be less than or equal to
|
||||
max_keycode as returned by
|
||||
.BR XDisplayKeycodes ,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
|
|
@ -134,28 +134,28 @@ first_keycode + num_codes \- 1
|
|||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
KeySym number N, counting from zero, for KeyCode K has the following index
|
||||
in keysyms, counting from zero:
|
||||
in keysyms, counting from zero:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
(K \- first_keycode) * keysyms_per_keycode + N
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The specified keysyms_per_keycode can be chosen arbitrarily by the client
|
||||
to be large enough to hold all desired symbols.
|
||||
A special KeySym value of
|
||||
to be large enough to hold all desired symbols.
|
||||
A special KeySym value of
|
||||
.B NoSymbol
|
||||
should be used to fill in unused elements
|
||||
for individual KeyCodes.
|
||||
It is legal for
|
||||
should be used to fill in unused elements
|
||||
for individual KeyCodes.
|
||||
It is legal for
|
||||
.B NoSymbol
|
||||
to appear in nontrailing positions
|
||||
of the effective list for a KeyCode.
|
||||
.B XChangeKeyboardMapping
|
||||
generates a
|
||||
generates a
|
||||
.B MappingNotify
|
||||
event.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
There is no requirement that the X server interpret this mapping.
|
||||
There is no requirement that the X server interpret this mapping.
|
||||
It is merely stored for reading and writing by clients.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XChangeKeyboardMapping
|
||||
|
|
@ -169,42 +169,42 @@ The
|
|||
.B XGetKeyboardMapping
|
||||
function returns the symbols for the specified number of KeyCodes
|
||||
starting with first_keycode.
|
||||
The value specified in first_keycode must be greater than
|
||||
The value specified in first_keycode must be greater than
|
||||
or equal to min_keycode as returned by
|
||||
.BR XDisplayKeycodes ,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
In addition, the following expression must be less than or equal
|
||||
In addition, the following expression must be less than or equal
|
||||
to max_keycode as returned by
|
||||
.BR XDisplayKeycodes :
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
first_keycode + keycode_count \- 1
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If this is not the case, a
|
||||
If this is not the case, a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
The number of elements in the KeySyms list is:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
keycode_count * keysyms_per_keycode_return
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
KeySym number N, counting from zero, for KeyCode K has the following index
|
||||
in the list, counting from zero:
|
||||
in the list, counting from zero:
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
(K \- first_code) * keysyms_per_code_return + N
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The X server arbitrarily chooses the keysyms_per_keycode_return value
|
||||
to be large enough to report all requested symbols.
|
||||
A special KeySym value of
|
||||
The X server arbitrarily chooses the keysyms_per_keycode_return value
|
||||
to be large enough to report all requested symbols.
|
||||
A special KeySym value of
|
||||
.B NoSymbol
|
||||
is used to fill in unused elements for
|
||||
individual KeyCodes.
|
||||
To free the storage returned by
|
||||
To free the storage returned by
|
||||
.BR XGetKeyboardMapping ,
|
||||
use
|
||||
.BR XFree .
|
||||
|
|
@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Not all KeyCodes in this range are required to have corresponding keys.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XSetModifierMapping
|
||||
function specifies the KeyCodes of the keys (if any) that are to be used
|
||||
function specifies the KeyCodes of the keys (if any) that are to be used
|
||||
as modifiers.
|
||||
If it succeeds,
|
||||
the X server generates a
|
||||
|
|
@ -240,10 +240,10 @@ structure, a
|
|||
.B BadLength
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The modifiermap member of the
|
||||
The modifiermap member of the
|
||||
.B XModifierKeymap
|
||||
structure contains 8 sets of max_keypermod KeyCodes,
|
||||
one for each modifier in the order
|
||||
structure contains 8 sets of max_keypermod KeyCodes,
|
||||
one for each modifier in the order
|
||||
.BR Shift ,
|
||||
.BR Lock ,
|
||||
.BR Control ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -251,30 +251,30 @@ one for each modifier in the order
|
|||
.BR Mod2 ,
|
||||
.BR Mod3 ,
|
||||
.BR Mod4 ,
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR Mod5 .
|
||||
Only nonzero KeyCodes have meaning in each set,
|
||||
Only nonzero KeyCodes have meaning in each set,
|
||||
and zero KeyCodes are ignored.
|
||||
In addition, all of the nonzero KeyCodes must be in the range specified by
|
||||
min_keycode and max_keycode in the
|
||||
In addition, all of the nonzero KeyCodes must be in the range specified by
|
||||
min_keycode and max_keycode in the
|
||||
.B Display
|
||||
structure,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
An X server can impose restrictions on how modifiers can be changed,
|
||||
An X server can impose restrictions on how modifiers can be changed,
|
||||
for example,
|
||||
if certain keys do not generate up transitions in hardware,
|
||||
if auto-repeat cannot be disabled on certain keys,
|
||||
or if multiple modifier keys are not supported.
|
||||
If some such restriction is violated,
|
||||
or if multiple modifier keys are not supported.
|
||||
If some such restriction is violated,
|
||||
the status reply is
|
||||
.BR MappingFailed ,
|
||||
and none of the modifiers are changed.
|
||||
If the new KeyCodes specified for a modifier differ from those
|
||||
currently defined and any (current or new) keys for that modifier are
|
||||
in the logically down state,
|
||||
in the logically down state,
|
||||
.B XSetModifierMapping
|
||||
returns
|
||||
.BR MappingBusy ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ and none of the modifiers is changed.
|
|||
.B XSetModifierMapping
|
||||
can generate
|
||||
.B BadAlloc
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ function returns a pointer to a newly created
|
|||
structure that contains the keys being used as modifiers.
|
||||
The structure should be freed after use by calling
|
||||
.BR XFreeModifiermap .
|
||||
If only zero values appear in the set for any modifier,
|
||||
If only zero values appear in the set for any modifier,
|
||||
that modifier is disabled.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -346,6 +346,6 @@ alternatives can generate this error.
|
|||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
XFree(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XkbGetMap(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XSetPointerMapping(__libmansuffix__)
|
||||
XSetPointerMapping(__libmansuffix__)
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\fI\*(xL\fP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
|
|||
.ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
|
||||
.TH XChangePointerControl __libmansuffix__ __xorgversion__ "XLIB FUNCTIONS"
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
XChangePointerControl, XGetPointerControl \- control pointer
|
||||
XChangePointerControl, XGetPointerControl \- control pointer
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XChangePointerControl\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Bool \fIdo_accel\fP\^,
|
||||
|
|
@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ Returns the numerator for the acceleration multiplier.
|
|||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIdo_accel\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the values for
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the values for
|
||||
the accel_numerator or accel_denominator are used.
|
||||
.IP \fIdo_threshold\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the value for the
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the value for the
|
||||
threshold is used.
|
||||
.IP \fIthreshold\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the acceleration threshold.
|
||||
|
|
@ -83,15 +83,15 @@ The
|
|||
.B XChangePointerControl
|
||||
function defines how the pointing device moves.
|
||||
The acceleration, expressed as a fraction, is a
|
||||
multiplier for movement.
|
||||
multiplier for movement.
|
||||
For example,
|
||||
specifying 3/1 means the pointer moves three times as fast as normal.
|
||||
The fraction may be rounded arbitrarily by the X server.
|
||||
The fraction may be rounded arbitrarily by the X server.
|
||||
Acceleration
|
||||
only takes effect if the pointer moves more than threshold pixels at
|
||||
once and only applies to the amount beyond the value in the threshold argument.
|
||||
Setting a value to \-1 restores the default.
|
||||
The values of the do_accel and do_threshold arguments must be
|
||||
The values of the do_accel and do_threshold arguments must be
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
for the pointer values to be set,
|
||||
or the parameters are unchanged.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Specifies the window that you want to add or delete from the client's save-set.
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Depending on the specified mode,
|
||||
.B XChangeSaveSet
|
||||
either inserts or deletes the specified window from the client's save-set.
|
||||
either inserts or deletes the specified window from the client's save-set.
|
||||
The specified window must have been created by some other client,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ int XSetWindowBackground\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, unsigne
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window
|
||||
\fIw\fP\^, Pixmap \fIbackground_pixmap\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XSetWindowBorder\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, unsigned long \fIborder_pixel\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XSetWindowBorderPixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Pixmap \fIborder_pixmap\fP\^);
|
||||
|
|
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Specifies the background pixmap,
|
|||
or
|
||||
.BR None .
|
||||
.IP \fIborder_pixel\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the entry in the colormap.
|
||||
Specifies the entry in the colormap.
|
||||
.IP \fIborder_pixmap\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the border pixmap or
|
||||
.BR CopyFromParent .
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ function uses the window attributes in the
|
|||
structure to change the specified window attributes.
|
||||
Changing the background does not cause the window contents to be
|
||||
changed.
|
||||
To repaint the window and its background, use
|
||||
To repaint the window and its background, use
|
||||
.BR XClearWindow .
|
||||
Setting the border or changing the background such that the
|
||||
border tile origin changes causes the border to be repainted.
|
||||
Changing the background of a root window to
|
||||
Changing the background of a root window to
|
||||
.B None
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B ParentRelative
|
||||
restores the default background pixmap.
|
||||
Changing the border of a root window to
|
||||
|
|
@ -115,41 +115,41 @@ Changing the border of a root window to
|
|||
restores the default border pixmap.
|
||||
Changing the win-gravity does not affect the current position of the
|
||||
window.
|
||||
Changing the backing-store of an obscured window to
|
||||
Changing the backing-store of an obscured window to
|
||||
.B WhenMapped
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR Always ,
|
||||
or changing the backing-planes, backing-pixel, or
|
||||
save-under of a mapped window may have no immediate effect.
|
||||
Changing the colormap of a window (that is, defining a new map, not
|
||||
changing the contents of the existing map) generates a
|
||||
changing the contents of the existing map) generates a
|
||||
.B ColormapNotify
|
||||
event.
|
||||
Changing the colormap of a visible window may have no
|
||||
immediate effect on the screen because the map may not be installed
|
||||
(see
|
||||
.BR XInstallColormap ).
|
||||
Changing the cursor of a root window to
|
||||
Changing the cursor of a root window to
|
||||
.B None
|
||||
restores the default
|
||||
cursor.
|
||||
Whenever possible, you are encouraged to share colormaps.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Multiple clients can select input on the same window.
|
||||
Multiple clients can select input on the same window.
|
||||
Their event masks are maintained separately.
|
||||
When an event is generated,
|
||||
it is reported to all interested clients.
|
||||
However, only one client at a time can select for
|
||||
When an event is generated,
|
||||
it is reported to all interested clients.
|
||||
However, only one client at a time can select for
|
||||
.BR SubstructureRedirectMask ,
|
||||
.BR ResizeRedirectMask ,
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR ButtonPressMask .
|
||||
If a client attempts to select any of these event masks
|
||||
and some other client has already selected one,
|
||||
If a client attempts to select any of these event masks
|
||||
and some other client has already selected one,
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadAccess
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
There is only one do-not-propagate-mask for a window,
|
||||
There is only one do-not-propagate-mask for a window,
|
||||
not one per client.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XChangeWindowAttributes
|
||||
|
|
@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ function sets the background of the window to the specified pixel value.
|
|||
Changing the background does not cause the window contents to be changed.
|
||||
.B XSetWindowBackground
|
||||
uses a pixmap of undefined size filled with the pixel value you passed.
|
||||
If you try to change the background of an
|
||||
If you try to change the background of an
|
||||
.B InputOnly
|
||||
window, a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
|
|
@ -188,12 +188,12 @@ The
|
|||
function sets the background pixmap of the window to the specified pixmap.
|
||||
The background pixmap can immediately be freed if no further explicit
|
||||
references to it are to be made.
|
||||
If
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B ParentRelative
|
||||
is specified,
|
||||
is specified,
|
||||
the background pixmap of the window's parent is used,
|
||||
or on the root window, the default background is restored.
|
||||
If you try to change the background of an
|
||||
If you try to change the background of an
|
||||
.B InputOnly
|
||||
window, a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
|
|
@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ can generate
|
|||
and
|
||||
.B BadWindow
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XSetWindowBorder
|
||||
function sets the border of the window to the pixel value you specify.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -69,12 +69,12 @@ Specifies the window.
|
|||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of the rectangle.
|
||||
.ds Xy
|
||||
.ds Xy
|
||||
.IP \fIx\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the window
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the window
|
||||
and specify the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -87,16 +87,16 @@ If width is zero, it
|
|||
is replaced with the current width of the window minus x.
|
||||
If height is
|
||||
zero, it is replaced with the current height of the window minus y.
|
||||
If the window has a defined background tile,
|
||||
If the window has a defined background tile,
|
||||
the rectangle clipped by any children is filled with this tile.
|
||||
If the window has
|
||||
background
|
||||
background
|
||||
.BR None ,
|
||||
the contents of the window are not changed.
|
||||
the contents of the window are not changed.
|
||||
In either
|
||||
case, if exposures is
|
||||
case, if exposures is
|
||||
.BR True ,
|
||||
one or more
|
||||
one or more
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events are generated for regions of the rectangle that are either visible or are
|
||||
being retained in a backing store.
|
||||
|
|
@ -119,21 +119,21 @@ The
|
|||
function clears the entire area in the specified window and is
|
||||
equivalent to
|
||||
.B XClearArea
|
||||
(display, w, 0, 0, 0, 0,
|
||||
(display, w, 0, 0, 0, 0,
|
||||
.BR False ).
|
||||
If the window has a defined background tile, the rectangle is tiled with a
|
||||
plane-mask of all ones and
|
||||
plane-mask of all ones and
|
||||
.B GXcopy
|
||||
function.
|
||||
If the window has
|
||||
background
|
||||
background
|
||||
.BR None ,
|
||||
the contents of the window are not changed.
|
||||
the contents of the window are not changed.
|
||||
If you specify a window whose class is
|
||||
.BR InputOnly ,
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XClearWindow
|
||||
can generate
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,12 +92,12 @@ but expanded from the 16-bit least-significant bits to a full 32-bit value.
|
|||
The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
|
||||
dispatchers.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The message_type member is set to an atom that indicates how the data
|
||||
The message_type member is set to an atom that indicates how the data
|
||||
should be interpreted by the receiving client.
|
||||
The format member is set to 8, 16, or 32 and specifies whether the data
|
||||
should be viewed as a list of bytes, shorts, or longs.
|
||||
The data member is a union that contains the members b, s, and l.
|
||||
The b, s, and l members represent data of twenty 8-bit values,
|
||||
The b, s, and l members represent data of twenty 8-bit values,
|
||||
ten 16-bit values, and five 32-bit values.
|
||||
Particular message types might not make use of all these values.
|
||||
The X server places no interpretation on the values in the window,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,17 +88,17 @@ but expanded from the 16-bit least-significant bits to a full 32-bit value.
|
|||
The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
|
||||
dispatchers.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The window member is set to the window whose associated
|
||||
The window member is set to the window whose associated
|
||||
colormap is changed, installed, or uninstalled.
|
||||
For a colormap that is changed, installed, or uninstalled,
|
||||
the colormap member is set to the colormap associated with the window.
|
||||
the colormap member is set to the colormap associated with the window.
|
||||
For a colormap that is changed by a call to
|
||||
.BR XFreeColormap ,
|
||||
the colormap member is set to
|
||||
.BR None .
|
||||
The new member is set to indicate whether the colormap
|
||||
The new member is set to indicate whether the colormap
|
||||
for the specified window was changed or installed or uninstalled
|
||||
and can be
|
||||
and can be
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
|
|
@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ If it is
|
|||
.BR False ,
|
||||
the colormap was installed or uninstalled.
|
||||
The state member is always set to indicate whether the colormap is installed or
|
||||
uninstalled and can be
|
||||
uninstalled and can be
|
||||
.B ColormapInstalled
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR ColormapUninstalled .
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -97,29 +97,29 @@ depending on whether
|
|||
or
|
||||
.B SubstructureNotify
|
||||
was selected.
|
||||
The window member is set to the window whose size, position,
|
||||
The window member is set to the window whose size, position,
|
||||
border, and/or stacking
|
||||
order was changed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the parent window's
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the parent window's
|
||||
origin and indicate the position of the upper-left outside corner of the window.
|
||||
The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window,
|
||||
The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window,
|
||||
not including
|
||||
the border.
|
||||
The border_width member is set to the width of the window's border, in pixels.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The above member is set to the sibling window and is used
|
||||
The above member is set to the sibling window and is used
|
||||
for stacking operations.
|
||||
If the X server sets this member to
|
||||
.BR None ,
|
||||
the window whose state was changed is on the bottom of the stack
|
||||
with respect to sibling windows.
|
||||
However, if this member is set to a sibling window,
|
||||
However, if this member is set to a sibling window,
|
||||
the window whose state was changed is placed on top of this sibling window.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The override_redirect member is set to the override-redirect attribute of the
|
||||
window.
|
||||
Window manager clients normally should ignore this window if the
|
||||
Window manager clients normally should ignore this window if the
|
||||
override_redirect member
|
||||
is
|
||||
.BR True .
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
|
|||
dispatchers.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The parent member is set to the parent window.
|
||||
The window member is set to the window whose size, position, border width,
|
||||
The window member is set to the window whose size, position, border width,
|
||||
and/or stacking order is to be reconfigured.
|
||||
The value_mask member indicates which components were specified in the
|
||||
.B ConfigureWindow
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -60,10 +60,10 @@ int XResizeWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, unsigned
|
|||
\fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XMoveResizeWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XSetWindowBorderWidth\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned \fIwidth\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned \fIwidth\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Specifies which values are to be set using information in
|
|||
the values structure.
|
||||
This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid configure window values bits.
|
||||
.IP \fIvalues\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
.B XWindowChanges
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.IP \fIw\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ Specify the width and height, which are the interior dimensions of the window.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the new location of the top-left pixel
|
||||
of the window's border or the window itself if it has no border
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the new location of the top-left pixel
|
||||
of the window's border or the window itself if it has no border
|
||||
or define the new position of the window relative to its parent.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ If a sibling is specified without a stack_mode or if the window
|
|||
is not actually a sibling,
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
Note that the computations for
|
||||
.BR BottomIf ,
|
||||
.BR TopIf ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ other arguments passed to
|
|||
not its initial geometry.
|
||||
Any backing store contents of the window, its
|
||||
inferiors, and other newly visible windows are either discarded or
|
||||
changed to reflect the current screen contents
|
||||
changed to reflect the current screen contents
|
||||
(depending on the implementation).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XConfigureWindow
|
||||
|
|
@ -131,26 +131,26 @@ The
|
|||
function moves the specified window to the specified x and y coordinates,
|
||||
but it does not change the window's size, raise the window, or
|
||||
change the mapping state of the window.
|
||||
Moving a mapped window may or may not lose the window's contents
|
||||
depending on if the window is obscured by nonchildren
|
||||
Moving a mapped window may or may not lose the window's contents
|
||||
depending on if the window is obscured by nonchildren
|
||||
and if no backing store exists.
|
||||
If the contents of the window are lost,
|
||||
If the contents of the window are lost,
|
||||
the X server generates
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events.
|
||||
Moving a mapped window generates
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events on any formerly obscured windows.
|
||||
events on any formerly obscured windows.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the override-redirect flag of the window is
|
||||
If the override-redirect flag of the window is
|
||||
.B False
|
||||
and some
|
||||
other client has selected
|
||||
other client has selected
|
||||
.B SubstructureRedirectMask
|
||||
on the parent, the X server generates a
|
||||
.B ConfigureRequest
|
||||
event, and no further processing is
|
||||
performed.
|
||||
performed.
|
||||
Otherwise, the window is moved.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XMoveWindow
|
||||
|
|
@ -167,19 +167,19 @@ the origin and does not restack the window.
|
|||
Changing the size of a mapped window may lose its contents and generate
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events.
|
||||
If a mapped window is made smaller,
|
||||
If a mapped window is made smaller,
|
||||
changing its size generates
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events on windows that the mapped window formerly obscured.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the override-redirect flag of the window is
|
||||
If the override-redirect flag of the window is
|
||||
.B False
|
||||
and some
|
||||
other client has selected
|
||||
other client has selected
|
||||
.B SubstructureRedirectMask
|
||||
on the parent, the X server generates a
|
||||
.B ConfigureRequest
|
||||
event, and no further processing is performed.
|
||||
event, and no further processing is performed.
|
||||
If either width or height is zero,
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
|
|
@ -194,24 +194,24 @@ errors.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XMoveResizeWindow
|
||||
function changes the size and location of the specified window
|
||||
function changes the size and location of the specified window
|
||||
without raising it.
|
||||
Moving and resizing a mapped window may generate an
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
event on the window.
|
||||
Depending on the new size and location parameters,
|
||||
moving and resizing a window may generate
|
||||
moving and resizing a window may generate
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events on windows that the window formerly obscured.
|
||||
events on windows that the window formerly obscured.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the override-redirect flag of the window is
|
||||
If the override-redirect flag of the window is
|
||||
.B False
|
||||
and some
|
||||
other client has selected
|
||||
other client has selected
|
||||
.B SubstructureRedirectMask
|
||||
on the parent, the X server generates a
|
||||
.B ConfigureRequest
|
||||
event, and no further processing is performed.
|
||||
event, and no further processing is performed.
|
||||
Otherwise, the window size and location are changed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XMoveResizeWindow
|
||||
|
|
@ -317,16 +317,16 @@ If you attempt to set the border-width attribute of an
|
|||
.B InputOnly
|
||||
window nonzero, a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The sibling member is used to set the sibling window for stacking operations.
|
||||
The stack_mode member is used to set how the window is to be restacked
|
||||
The stack_mode member is used to set how the window is to be restacked
|
||||
and can be set to
|
||||
.BR Above ,
|
||||
.BR Below ,
|
||||
.BR TopIf ,
|
||||
.BR BottomIf ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR Opposite .
|
||||
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
.TP 1i
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned \fIheight\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, int
|
|||
int XCopyPlane\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fIsrc\fP\^, Drawable
|
||||
\fIdest\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIsrc_x\fP\^, int \fIsrc_y\fP\^, unsigned
|
||||
\fIwidth\fP\^, int \fIheight\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, int \fIdest_y\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned long \fIplane\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned long \fIplane\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdest_x\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIdest_y\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the destination rectangle and specify its upper-left corner.
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the destination rectangle and specify its upper-left corner.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -76,24 +76,24 @@ You must set exactly one bit to 1.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIdest\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the source and destination rectangles to be combined.
|
||||
Specify the source and destination rectangles to be combined.
|
||||
.IP \fIsrc_x\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIsrc_y\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates,
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates,
|
||||
which are relative to the origin of the source rectangle
|
||||
and specify its upper-left corner.
|
||||
.IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions
|
||||
Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions
|
||||
of both the source and destination rectangles.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XCopyArea
|
||||
function combines the specified rectangle of src with the specified rectangle
|
||||
function combines the specified rectangle of src with the specified rectangle
|
||||
of dest.
|
||||
The drawables must have the same root and depth,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ or a
|
|||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If regions of the source rectangle are obscured and have not been
|
||||
retained in backing store
|
||||
or if regions outside the boundaries of the source drawable are specified,
|
||||
those regions are not copied.
|
||||
Instead, the
|
||||
retained in backing store
|
||||
or if regions outside the boundaries of the source drawable are specified,
|
||||
those regions are not copied.
|
||||
Instead, the
|
||||
following occurs on all corresponding destination regions that are either
|
||||
visible or are retained in backing store.
|
||||
If the destination is a window with a background other than
|
||||
visible or are retained in backing store.
|
||||
If the destination is a window with a background other than
|
||||
.BR None ,
|
||||
corresponding regions
|
||||
of the destination are tiled with that background
|
||||
|
|
@ -115,12 +115,12 @@ of the destination are tiled with that background
|
|||
.B GXcopy
|
||||
function).
|
||||
Regardless of tiling or whether the destination is a window or a pixmap,
|
||||
if graphics-exposures is
|
||||
if graphics-exposures is
|
||||
.BR True ,
|
||||
then
|
||||
.B GraphicsExpose
|
||||
events for all corresponding destination regions are generated.
|
||||
If graphics-exposures is
|
||||
If graphics-exposures is
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
but no
|
||||
.B GraphicsExpose
|
||||
|
|
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Note that by default graphics-exposures is
|
|||
.B True
|
||||
in new GCs.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
|
||||
This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
|
||||
subwindow-mode, graphics-exposures, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -156,17 +156,17 @@ is not less than %2 sup n%, where \fIn\fP is the depth of src, a
|
|||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Effectively,
|
||||
Effectively,
|
||||
.B XCopyPlane
|
||||
forms a pixmap of the same depth as the rectangle of dest and with a
|
||||
size specified by the source region.
|
||||
size specified by the source region.
|
||||
It uses the foreground/background pixels in the GC (foreground
|
||||
everywhere the bit plane in src contains a bit set to 1,
|
||||
background everywhere the bit plane in src contains a bit set to 0)
|
||||
and the equivalent of a
|
||||
and the equivalent of a
|
||||
.B CopyArea
|
||||
protocol request is performed with all the same exposure semantics.
|
||||
This can also be thought of as using the specified region of the source
|
||||
This can also be thought of as using the specified region of the source
|
||||
bit plane as a stipple with a fill-style of
|
||||
.B FillOpaqueStippled
|
||||
for filling a rectangular area of the destination.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -54,15 +54,15 @@ Colormap XCreateColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
|
|||
Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^, int \fIalloc\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Colormap XCopyColormapAndFree\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
|
||||
\fIcolormap\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIcolormap\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFreeColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^);
|
||||
int XFreeColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIalloc\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the colormap entries to be allocated.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B AllocNone
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR AllocAll .
|
||||
.IP \fIcolormap\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the colormap that you want to create, copy, set, or destroy.
|
||||
|
|
@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Specifies the colormap that you want to create, copy, set, or destroy.
|
|||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIvisual\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a visual type supported on the screen.
|
||||
If the visual type is not one supported by the screen,
|
||||
If the visual type is not one supported by the screen,
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
|
|
@ -79,12 +79,12 @@ Specifies the window on whose screen you want to create a colormap.
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XCreateColormap
|
||||
function creates a colormap of the specified visual type for the screen
|
||||
on which the specified window resides and returns the colormap ID
|
||||
function creates a colormap of the specified visual type for the screen
|
||||
on which the specified window resides and returns the colormap ID
|
||||
associated with it.
|
||||
Note that the specified window is only used to determine the screen.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The initial values of the colormap entries are undefined for the
|
||||
The initial values of the colormap entries are undefined for the
|
||||
visual classes
|
||||
.BR GrayScale ,
|
||||
.BR PseudoColor ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ For
|
|||
.BR DirectColor ,
|
||||
the effect is as if an
|
||||
.B XAllocColorPlanes
|
||||
call returned a pixel value of zero and red_mask, green_mask,
|
||||
call returned a pixel value of zero and red_mask, green_mask,
|
||||
and blue_mask values containing the same bits as the corresponding
|
||||
masks in the specified visual.
|
||||
However, in all cases,
|
||||
|
|
@ -152,13 +152,13 @@ The
|
|||
function creates a colormap of the same visual type and for the same screen
|
||||
as the specified colormap and returns the new colormap ID.
|
||||
It also moves all of the client's existing allocation from the specified
|
||||
colormap to the new colormap with their color values intact
|
||||
and their read-only or writable characteristics intact and frees those entries
|
||||
colormap to the new colormap with their color values intact
|
||||
and their read-only or writable characteristics intact and frees those entries
|
||||
in the specified colormap.
|
||||
Color values in other entries in the new colormap are undefined.
|
||||
If the specified colormap was created by the client with alloc set to
|
||||
.BR AllocAll ,
|
||||
the new colormap is also created with
|
||||
the new colormap is also created with
|
||||
.BR AllocAll ,
|
||||
all color values for all entries are copied from the specified colormap,
|
||||
and then all entries in the specified colormap are freed.
|
||||
|
|
@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ errors.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XFreeColormap
|
||||
function deletes the association between the colormap resource ID
|
||||
function deletes the association between the colormap resource ID
|
||||
and the colormap and frees the colormap storage.
|
||||
However, this function has no effect on the default colormap for a screen.
|
||||
If the specified colormap is an installed map for a screen,
|
||||
|
|
@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ structure contains:
|
|||
typedef struct {
|
||||
unsigned long pixel; /\&* pixel value */
|
||||
unsigned short red, green, blue; /\&* rgb values */
|
||||
char flags; /\&* DoRed, DoGreen, DoBlue */
|
||||
char flags; /\&* DoRed, DoGreen, DoBlue */
|
||||
char pad;
|
||||
} XColor;
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
|
|
@ -224,15 +224,15 @@ The red, green, and blue values are always in the range 0 to 65535
|
|||
inclusive, independent of the number of bits actually used in the
|
||||
display hardware.
|
||||
The server scales these values down to the range used by the hardware.
|
||||
Black is represented by (0,0,0),
|
||||
Black is represented by (0,0,0),
|
||||
and white is represented by (65535,65535,65535).
|
||||
.IN "Color"
|
||||
In some functions,
|
||||
the flags member controls which of the red, green, and blue members is used
|
||||
the flags member controls which of the red, green, and blue members is used
|
||||
and can be the inclusive OR of zero or more of
|
||||
.BR DoRed ,
|
||||
.BR DoGreen ,
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR DoBlue .
|
||||
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
.TP 1i
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ XCreateFontCursor, XCreatePixmapCursor, XCreateGlyphCursor \- create cursors
|
|||
\&#include <X11/cursorfont.h>
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Cursor XCreateFontCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIshape\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIshape\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Pixmap
|
||||
\fIsource\fP\^, Pixmap \fImask\fP\^, XColor *\fIforeground_color\fP\^, XColor
|
||||
|
|
@ -61,19 +61,19 @@ Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Pixmap
|
|||
Cursor XCreateGlyphCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Font
|
||||
\fIsource_font\fP\^, Font \fImask_font\fP\^, unsigned int \fIsource_char\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned int \fImask_char\fP\^, XColor *\fIforeground_color\fP\^, XColor
|
||||
*\fIbackground_color\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIbackground_color\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIbackground_color\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the RGB values for the background of the source.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIforeground_color\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source.
|
||||
Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source.
|
||||
.IP \fImask\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the cursor's source bits to be displayed or
|
||||
.BR None .
|
||||
.IP \fImask_char\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the glyph character for the mask.
|
||||
Specifies the glyph character for the mask.
|
||||
.IP \fImask_font\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the font for the mask glyph or
|
||||
.BR None .
|
||||
|
|
@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Specifies the font for the source glyph.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which indicate the
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which indicate the
|
||||
hotspot relative to the source's origin.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
X provides a set of standard cursor shapes in a special font named
|
||||
|
|
@ -124,15 +124,15 @@ or
|
|||
screen.
|
||||
The foreground color is used for the pixels set to 1 in the
|
||||
source, and the background color is used for the pixels set to 0.
|
||||
Both source and mask, if specified, must have depth one (or a
|
||||
Both source and mask, if specified, must have depth one (or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results) but can have any root.
|
||||
The mask argument defines the shape of the cursor.
|
||||
The pixels set to 1 in the mask define which source pixels are displayed,
|
||||
and the pixels set to 0 define which pixels are ignored.
|
||||
If no mask is given,
|
||||
If no mask is given,
|
||||
all pixels of the source are displayed.
|
||||
The mask, if present, must be the same size as the pixmap defined by the
|
||||
The mask, if present, must be the same size as the pixmap defined by the
|
||||
source argument, or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
|
|
@ -160,31 +160,31 @@ The
|
|||
.B XCreateGlyphCursor
|
||||
function is similar to
|
||||
.B XCreatePixmapCursor
|
||||
except that the source and mask bitmaps are obtained from the specified
|
||||
except that the source and mask bitmaps are obtained from the specified
|
||||
font glyphs.
|
||||
The source_char must be a defined glyph in source_font,
|
||||
The source_char must be a defined glyph in source_font,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If mask_font is given,
|
||||
If mask_font is given,
|
||||
mask_char must be a defined glyph in mask_font,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
The mask_font and character are optional.
|
||||
The origins of the source_char and mask_char (if defined) glyphs are
|
||||
positioned coincidently and define the hotspot.
|
||||
The source_char and mask_char need not have the same bounding box metrics,
|
||||
positioned coincidently and define the hotspot.
|
||||
The source_char and mask_char need not have the same bounding box metrics,
|
||||
and there is no restriction on the placement of the hotspot relative to the bounding
|
||||
boxes.
|
||||
boxes.
|
||||
If no mask_char is given, all pixels of the source are displayed.
|
||||
You can free the fonts immediately by calling
|
||||
.B XFreeFont
|
||||
if no further explicit references to them are to be made.
|
||||
if no further explicit references to them are to be made.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For 2-byte matrix fonts,
|
||||
For 2-byte matrix fonts,
|
||||
the 16-bit value should be formed with the byte1
|
||||
member in the most significant byte and the byte2 member in the
|
||||
member in the most significant byte and the byte2 member in the
|
||||
least significant byte.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XCreateGlyphCursor
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ XFontSet XCreateFontSet\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char
|
|||
*\fIbase_font_name_list\fP\^, char ***\fImissing_charset_list_return\fP\^, int
|
||||
*\fImissing_charset_count_return\fP\^, char **\fIdef_string_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
void XFreeFontSet\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
void XFreeFontSet\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ Returns the number of missing charsets.
|
|||
.IP \fImissing_charset_list_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the missing charsets.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XCreateFontSet
|
||||
function creates a font set for the specified display.
|
||||
The font set is bound to the current locale when
|
||||
The font set is bound to the current locale when
|
||||
.B XCreateFontSet
|
||||
is called.
|
||||
The font set may be used in subsequent calls to obtain font
|
||||
|
|
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ The base_font_name_list argument is a list of base font names
|
|||
that Xlib uses to load the fonts needed for the locale.
|
||||
The base font names are a comma-separated list.
|
||||
The string is null-terminated
|
||||
and is assumed to be in the Host Portable Character Encoding;
|
||||
and is assumed to be in the Host Portable Character Encoding;
|
||||
otherwise, the result is implementation-dependent.
|
||||
White space immediately on either side of a separating comma is ignored.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -103,17 +103,17 @@ If this action is successful in obtaining an XLFD name, the
|
|||
function will return this XLFD name instead of the client-supplied name.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Xlib uses the following algorithm to select the fonts
|
||||
that will be used to display text with the
|
||||
that will be used to display text with the
|
||||
.BR XFontSet .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For each font charset required by the locale,
|
||||
the base font name list is searched for the first appearance of one
|
||||
the base font name list is searched for the first appearance of one
|
||||
of the following cases that names a set of fonts that exist at the server:
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
The first XLFD-conforming base font name that specifies the required
|
||||
charset or a superset of the required charset in its
|
||||
charset or a superset of the required charset in its
|
||||
.B CharSetRegistry
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B CharSetEncoding
|
||||
fields.
|
||||
The implementation may use a base font name whose specified charset
|
||||
|
|
@ -123,17 +123,17 @@ an ISO8859-1 font for an ASCII charset.
|
|||
The first set of one or more XLFD-conforming base font names
|
||||
that specify one or more charsets that can be remapped to support the
|
||||
required charset.
|
||||
The Xlib implementation may recognize various mappings
|
||||
The Xlib implementation may recognize various mappings
|
||||
from a required charset to one or more other charsets
|
||||
and use the fonts for those charsets.
|
||||
For example, JIS Roman is ASCII with tilde and backslash replaced
|
||||
For example, JIS Roman is ASCII with tilde and backslash replaced
|
||||
by yen and overbar;
|
||||
Xlib may load an ISO8859-1 font to support this character set
|
||||
if a JIS Roman font is not available.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
The first XLFD-conforming font name or the first non-XLFD font name
|
||||
for which an XLFD font name can be obtained, combined with the
|
||||
required charset (replacing the
|
||||
required charset (replacing the
|
||||
.B CharSetRegistry
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B CharSetEncoding
|
||||
|
|
@ -186,9 +186,9 @@ For example:
|
|||
"-*-*-*-R-Normal--*-180-100-100-*-*"
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B XCreateFontSet
|
||||
is unable to create the font set,
|
||||
is unable to create the font set,
|
||||
either because there is insufficient memory or because the current locale
|
||||
is not supported,
|
||||
.B XCreateFontSet
|
||||
|
|
@ -213,12 +213,12 @@ may be able to remap a required charset.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
If no font exists for any of the required charsets
|
||||
or if the locale definition in Xlib requires that a font exist
|
||||
for a particular charset and a font is not found for that charset,
|
||||
for a particular charset and a font is not found for that charset,
|
||||
.B XCreateFontSet
|
||||
returns NULL.
|
||||
Otherwise,
|
||||
Otherwise,
|
||||
.B XCreateFontSet
|
||||
returns a valid
|
||||
returns a valid
|
||||
.B XFontSet
|
||||
to font_set.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -229,24 +229,24 @@ drawable.
|
|||
If def_string_return is non-NULL,
|
||||
.B XCreateFontSet
|
||||
returns a pointer to a string that represents the glyphs
|
||||
that are drawn with this
|
||||
that are drawn with this
|
||||
.B XFontSet
|
||||
when the charsets of the available fonts do not include all font glyphs
|
||||
required to draw a codepoint.
|
||||
The string does not necessarily consist of valid characters
|
||||
The string does not necessarily consist of valid characters
|
||||
in the current locale and is not necessarily drawn with
|
||||
the fonts loaded for the font set,
|
||||
but the client can draw and measure the default glyphs
|
||||
by including this string in a string being drawn or measured with the
|
||||
by including this string in a string being drawn or measured with the
|
||||
.BR XFontSet .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the string returned to def_string_return is the empty string ("\^"),
|
||||
no glyphs are drawn, and the escapement is zero.
|
||||
The returned string is null-terminated.
|
||||
It is owned by Xlib and should not be modified or freed by the client.
|
||||
It will be freed by a call to
|
||||
It will be freed by a call to
|
||||
.B XFreeFontSet
|
||||
with the associated
|
||||
with the associated
|
||||
.BR XFontSet .
|
||||
Until freed, its contents will not be modified by Xlib.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -254,23 +254,23 @@ The client is responsible for constructing an error message from the
|
|||
missing charset and default string information and may choose to continue
|
||||
operation in the case that some fonts did not exist.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The returned
|
||||
The returned
|
||||
.B XFontSet
|
||||
and missing charset list should be freed with
|
||||
and missing charset list should be freed with
|
||||
.B XFreeFontSet
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR XFreeStringList ,
|
||||
respectively.
|
||||
The client-supplied base_font_name_list may be freed
|
||||
by the client after calling
|
||||
The client-supplied base_font_name_list may be freed
|
||||
by the client after calling
|
||||
.BR XCreateFontSet .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XFreeFontSet
|
||||
function frees the specified font set.
|
||||
The associated base font name list, font name list,
|
||||
The associated base font name list, font name list,
|
||||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
list, and
|
||||
list, and
|
||||
.BR XFontSetExtents ,
|
||||
if any, are freed.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,23 +53,23 @@ XCreateGC, XCopyGC, XChangeGC, XGetGCValues, XFreeGC, XGContextFromGC, XGCValues
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
GC XCreateGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, unsigned long
|
||||
\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\^\fIvalues\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\^\fIvalues\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XCopyGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIsrc\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned long \fIvaluemask\fP\^, GC \fIdest\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned long \fIvaluemask\fP\^, GC \fIdest\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XChangeGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned long
|
||||
\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\^\fIvalues\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\^\fIvalues\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XGetGCValues\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned long
|
||||
\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\fIvalues_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\fIvalues_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFreeGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^);
|
||||
int XFreeGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
GContext XGContextFromGC\^(\^GC \fIgc\fP\^);
|
||||
GContext XGContextFromGC\^(\^GC \fIgc\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdest\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the destination GC.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Specifies the GC.
|
|||
.IP \fIsrc\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the components of the source GC.
|
||||
.IP \fIvaluemask\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies which components in the GC are to be set, copied, changed, or returned.
|
||||
Specifies which components in the GC are to be set, copied, changed, or returned.
|
||||
This argument is the bitwise inclusive OR of zero or more of the valid
|
||||
GC component mask bits.
|
||||
.IP \fIvalues\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -133,13 +133,13 @@ The
|
|||
function changes the components specified by valuemask for
|
||||
the specified GC.
|
||||
The values argument contains the values to be set.
|
||||
The values and restrictions are the same as for
|
||||
The values and restrictions are the same as for
|
||||
.BR XCreateGC .
|
||||
Changing the clip-mask overrides any previous
|
||||
Changing the clip-mask overrides any previous
|
||||
.B XSetClipRectangles
|
||||
request on the context.
|
||||
request on the context.
|
||||
Changing the dash-offset or dash-list
|
||||
overrides any previous
|
||||
overrides any previous
|
||||
.B XSetDashes
|
||||
request on the context.
|
||||
The order in which components are verified and altered is server dependent.
|
||||
|
|
@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ sets the requested components in values_return and returns a nonzero status.
|
|||
Otherwise, it returns a zero status.
|
||||
Note that the clip-mask and dash-list (represented by the
|
||||
.B GCClipMask
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B GCDashList
|
||||
bits, respectively, in the valuemask)
|
||||
cannot be requested.
|
||||
|
|
@ -365,17 +365,17 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The function attributes of a GC are used when you update a section of
|
||||
a drawable (the destination) with bits from somewhere else (the source).
|
||||
a drawable (the destination) with bits from somewhere else (the source).
|
||||
The function in a GC defines how the new destination bits are to be
|
||||
computed from the source bits and the old destination bits.
|
||||
.B GXcopy
|
||||
is typically the most useful because it will work on a color display,
|
||||
but special applications may use other functions,
|
||||
particularly in concert with particular planes of a color display.
|
||||
The 16 GC functions, defined in
|
||||
The 16 GC functions, defined in
|
||||
.hN X11/X.h ,
|
||||
are:
|
||||
.\" are listed in Table 5-1 along with the
|
||||
.\" are listed in Table 5-1 along with the
|
||||
.\"the associated hexadecimal code
|
||||
.\" and operation.
|
||||
.\".CP T 1
|
||||
|
|
@ -515,16 +515,16 @@ will be the least significant bit of the word.
|
|||
As planes are added to the display hardware, they will occupy more
|
||||
significant bits in the plane mask.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
In graphics operations, given a source and destination pixel,
|
||||
In graphics operations, given a source and destination pixel,
|
||||
the result is computed bitwise on corresponding bits of the pixels.
|
||||
That is, a Boolean operation is performed in each bit plane.
|
||||
That is, a Boolean operation is performed in each bit plane.
|
||||
The plane_mask restricts the operation to a subset of planes.
|
||||
A macro constant
|
||||
.B AllPlanes
|
||||
can be used to refer to all planes of the screen simultaneously.
|
||||
The result is computed by the following:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
((src FUNC dst) AND plane-mask) OR (dst AND (NOT plane-mask))
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -554,28 +554,28 @@ If the center of the pixel is exactly on the bounding box,
|
|||
it is part of the line if and only if the interior is immediately to its right
|
||||
(x increasing direction).
|
||||
Pixels with centers on a horizontal edge are a special case and are part of
|
||||
the line if and only if the interior or the boundary is immediately below
|
||||
the line if and only if the interior or the boundary is immediately below
|
||||
(y increasing direction) and the interior or the boundary is immediately
|
||||
to the right (x increasing direction).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Thin lines (zero line-width) are one-pixel-wide lines drawn using an
|
||||
unspecified, device-dependent algorithm.
|
||||
There are only two constraints on this algorithm.
|
||||
There are only two constraints on this algorithm.
|
||||
.IP 1. 5
|
||||
If a line is drawn unclipped from [x1,y1] to [x2,y2] and
|
||||
if another line is drawn unclipped from [x1+dx,y1+dy] to [x2+dx,y2+dy],
|
||||
a point [x,y] is touched by drawing the first line
|
||||
a point [x,y] is touched by drawing the first line
|
||||
if and only if the point [x+dx,y+dy] is touched by drawing the second line.
|
||||
.IP 2. 5
|
||||
The effective set of points comprising a line cannot be affected by clipping.
|
||||
That is, a point is touched in a clipped line if and only if the point
|
||||
That is, a point is touched in a clipped line if and only if the point
|
||||
lies inside the clipping region and the point would be touched
|
||||
by the line when drawn unclipped.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
A wide line drawn from [x1,y1] to [x2,y2] always draws the same pixels
|
||||
as a wide line drawn from [x2,y2] to [x1,y1], not counting cap-style
|
||||
A wide line drawn from [x1,y1] to [x2,y2] always draws the same pixels
|
||||
as a wide line drawn from [x2,y2] to [x1,y1], not counting cap-style
|
||||
and join-style.
|
||||
It is recommended that this property be true for thin lines,
|
||||
It is recommended that this property be true for thin lines,
|
||||
but this is not required.
|
||||
A line-width of zero may differ from a line-width of one in which pixels are
|
||||
drawn.
|
||||
|
|
@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ This permits the use of many manufacturers' line drawing hardware,
|
|||
which may run many times faster than the more precisely specified
|
||||
wide lines.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
In general,
|
||||
In general,
|
||||
drawing a thin line will be faster than drawing a wide line of width one.
|
||||
However, because of their different drawing algorithms,
|
||||
thin lines may not mix well aesthetically with wide lines.
|
||||
|
|
@ -602,8 +602,8 @@ T}
|
|||
T{
|
||||
.B LineDoubleDash
|
||||
T} T{
|
||||
The full path of the line is drawn,
|
||||
but the even dashes are filled differently
|
||||
The full path of the line is drawn,
|
||||
but the even dashes are filled differently
|
||||
from the odd dashes (see fill-style) with
|
||||
.B CapButt
|
||||
style used where even and odd dashes meet.
|
||||
|
|
@ -613,11 +613,11 @@ T{
|
|||
.B LineOnOffDash
|
||||
T} T{
|
||||
Only the even dashes are drawn,
|
||||
and cap-style applies to
|
||||
and cap-style applies to
|
||||
all internal ends of the individual dashes,
|
||||
except
|
||||
except
|
||||
.B CapNotLast
|
||||
is treated as
|
||||
is treated as
|
||||
.BR CapButt .
|
||||
T}
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
|
|
@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ lw(1.3i) lw(4.5i).
|
|||
T{
|
||||
.B CapNotLast
|
||||
T} T{
|
||||
This is equivalent to
|
||||
This is equivalent to
|
||||
.B CapButt
|
||||
except that for a line-width of zero the final endpoint is not drawn.
|
||||
T}
|
||||
|
|
@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ T{
|
|||
T} T{
|
||||
The line has a circular arc with the diameter equal to the line-width,
|
||||
centered on the endpoint.
|
||||
(This is equivalent to
|
||||
(This is equivalent to
|
||||
.B CapButt
|
||||
for line-width of zero).
|
||||
T}
|
||||
|
|
@ -654,9 +654,9 @@ T}
|
|||
T{
|
||||
.B CapProjecting
|
||||
T} T{
|
||||
The line is square at the end, but the path continues beyond the endpoint
|
||||
The line is square at the end, but the path continues beyond the endpoint
|
||||
for a distance equal to half the line-width.
|
||||
(This is equivalent to
|
||||
(This is equivalent to
|
||||
.B CapButt
|
||||
for line-width of zero).
|
||||
T}
|
||||
|
|
@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ T}
|
|||
T{
|
||||
.B JoinRound
|
||||
T} T{
|
||||
The corner is a circular arc with the diameter equal to the line-width,
|
||||
The corner is a circular arc with the diameter equal to the line-width,
|
||||
centered on the joinpoint.
|
||||
T}
|
||||
.sp 6p
|
||||
|
|
@ -691,8 +691,8 @@ endpoint styles with the triangular notch filled.
|
|||
T}
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2),
|
||||
when the cap-style is applied to both endpoints,
|
||||
For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2),
|
||||
when the cap-style is applied to both endpoints,
|
||||
the semantics depends on the line-width and the cap-style:
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
lw(1.3i) lw(.5i) lw(4i).
|
||||
|
|
@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ T{
|
|||
T} T{
|
||||
thin
|
||||
T} T{
|
||||
The results are device dependent,
|
||||
The results are device dependent,
|
||||
but the desired effect is that nothing is drawn.
|
||||
T}
|
||||
.sp 6p
|
||||
|
|
@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ T{
|
|||
T} T{
|
||||
thin
|
||||
T} T{
|
||||
The results are device dependent,
|
||||
The results are device dependent,
|
||||
but the desired effect is that a single pixel is drawn.
|
||||
T}
|
||||
.sp 6p
|
||||
|
|
@ -759,8 +759,8 @@ endpoint, and with the sides equal to the line-width.
|
|||
T}
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2),
|
||||
when the join-style is applied at one or both endpoints,
|
||||
For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2),
|
||||
when the join-style is applied at one or both endpoints,
|
||||
the effect is as if the line was removed from the overall path.
|
||||
However, if the total path consists of or is reduced to a single point joined
|
||||
with itself, the effect is the same as when the cap-style is applied at both
|
||||
|
|
@ -780,12 +780,12 @@ or a
|
|||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
The stipple pixmap must have depth one and must have the same root as the
|
||||
GC, or a
|
||||
GC, or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
For stipple operations where the fill-style is
|
||||
.B FillStippled
|
||||
but not
|
||||
but not
|
||||
.BR FillOpaqueStippled ,
|
||||
the stipple pattern is tiled in a
|
||||
single plane and acts as an additional clip mask to be ANDed with the clip-mask.
|
||||
|
|
@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ Although some sizes may be faster to use than others,
|
|||
any size pixmap can be used for tiling or stippling.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The fill-style defines the contents of the source for line, text, and
|
||||
fill requests.
|
||||
fill requests.
|
||||
For all text and fill requests (for example,
|
||||
.BR XDrawText ,
|
||||
.BR XDrawText16 ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -801,17 +801,17 @@ For all text and fill requests (for example,
|
|||
.BR XFillPolygon ,
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR XFillArc );
|
||||
for line requests
|
||||
with line-style
|
||||
for line requests
|
||||
with line-style
|
||||
.B LineSolid
|
||||
(for example,
|
||||
.BR XDrawLine ,
|
||||
.BR XDrawSegments ,
|
||||
.BR XDrawRectangle ,
|
||||
.BR XDrawArc );
|
||||
and for the even dashes for line requests with line-style
|
||||
and for the even dashes for line requests with line-style
|
||||
.B LineOnOffDash
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR LineDoubleDash ,
|
||||
the following apply:
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
|
|
@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ a destination and as a tile or stipple,
|
|||
the results are undefined.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For optimum performance,
|
||||
you should draw as much as possible with the same GC
|
||||
you should draw as much as possible with the same GC
|
||||
(without changing its components).
|
||||
The costs of changing GC components relative to using different GCs
|
||||
depend on the display hardware and the server implementation.
|
||||
|
|
@ -891,17 +891,17 @@ cached in display hardware and that such hardware can only cache a small number
|
|||
of GCs.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The dashes value is actually a simplified form of the
|
||||
more general patterns that can be set with
|
||||
more general patterns that can be set with
|
||||
.BR XSetDashes .
|
||||
Specifying a
|
||||
value of N is equivalent to specifying the two-element list [N, N] in
|
||||
value of N is equivalent to specifying the two-element list [N, N] in
|
||||
.BR XSetDashes .
|
||||
The value must be nonzero,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The clip-mask restricts writes to the destination drawable.
|
||||
The clip-mask restricts writes to the destination drawable.
|
||||
If the clip-mask is set to a pixmap,
|
||||
it must have depth one and have the same root as the GC,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
|
|
@ -915,8 +915,8 @@ The clip-mask also can be set by calling the
|
|||
or
|
||||
.B XSetRegion
|
||||
functions.
|
||||
Only pixels where the clip-mask has a bit set to 1 are drawn.
|
||||
Pixels are not drawn outside the area covered by the clip-mask
|
||||
Only pixels where the clip-mask has a bit set to 1 are drawn.
|
||||
Pixels are not drawn outside the area covered by the clip-mask
|
||||
or where the clip-mask has a bit set to 0.
|
||||
The clip-mask affects all graphics requests.
|
||||
The clip-mask does not clip sources.
|
||||
|
|
@ -927,27 +927,27 @@ You can set the subwindow-mode to
|
|||
.B ClipByChildren
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR IncludeInferiors .
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR ClipByChildren ,
|
||||
both source and destination windows are
|
||||
additionally clipped by all viewable
|
||||
additionally clipped by all viewable
|
||||
.B InputOutput
|
||||
children.
|
||||
For
|
||||
children.
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR IncludeInferiors ,
|
||||
neither source nor destination window is clipped by inferiors.
|
||||
neither source nor destination window is clipped by inferiors.
|
||||
This will result in including subwindow contents in the source
|
||||
and drawing through subwindow boundaries of the destination.
|
||||
The use of
|
||||
The use of
|
||||
.B IncludeInferiors
|
||||
on a window of one depth with mapped
|
||||
inferiors of differing depth is not illegal, but the semantics are
|
||||
undefined by the core protocol.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The fill-rule defines what pixels are inside (drawn) for
|
||||
paths given in
|
||||
paths given in
|
||||
.B XFillPolygon
|
||||
requests and can be set to
|
||||
requests and can be set to
|
||||
.B EvenOddRule
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR WindingRule .
|
||||
|
|
@ -955,8 +955,8 @@ For
|
|||
.BR EvenOddRule ,
|
||||
a point is inside if
|
||||
an infinite ray with the point as origin crosses the path an odd number
|
||||
of times.
|
||||
For
|
||||
of times.
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR WindingRule ,
|
||||
a point is inside if an infinite ray with the
|
||||
point as origin crosses an unequal number of clockwise and
|
||||
|
|
@ -969,22 +969,22 @@ The case where a directed line segment is coincident with the ray is
|
|||
uninteresting because you can simply choose a different ray that is not
|
||||
coincident with a segment.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For both
|
||||
For both
|
||||
.B EvenOddRule
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR WindingRule ,
|
||||
a point is infinitely small,
|
||||
and the path is an infinitely thin line.
|
||||
a point is infinitely small,
|
||||
and the path is an infinitely thin line.
|
||||
A pixel is inside if the center point of the pixel is inside
|
||||
and the center point is not on the boundary.
|
||||
and the center point is not on the boundary.
|
||||
If the center point is on the boundary,
|
||||
the pixel is inside if and only if the polygon interior is immediately to
|
||||
its right (x increasing direction).
|
||||
Pixels with centers on a horizontal edge are a special case
|
||||
and are inside if and only if the polygon interior is immediately below
|
||||
its right (x increasing direction).
|
||||
Pixels with centers on a horizontal edge are a special case
|
||||
and are inside if and only if the polygon interior is immediately below
|
||||
(y increasing direction).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The arc-mode controls filling in the
|
||||
The arc-mode controls filling in the
|
||||
.B XFillArcs
|
||||
function and can be set to
|
||||
.B ArcPieSlice
|
||||
|
|
@ -997,12 +997,12 @@ For
|
|||
.BR ArcChord ,
|
||||
the arcs are chord filled.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The graphics-exposure flag controls
|
||||
The graphics-exposure flag controls
|
||||
.B GraphicsExpose
|
||||
event generation
|
||||
for
|
||||
for
|
||||
.B XCopyArea
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B XCopyPlane
|
||||
requests (and any similar requests defined by extensions).
|
||||
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
|
|||
XCreateIC, XDestroyIC, XIMOfIC \- create, destroy, and obtain the input method of an input context
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XIC XCreateIC\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...\^);
|
||||
XIC XCreateIC\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
void XDestroyIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
|
||||
void XDestroyIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XIM XIMOfIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,15 +50,15 @@
|
|||
XCreateOC, XDestroyOC, XSetOCValues, XGetOCValues, XOMOfOC \- create output contexts
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XOC XCreateOC\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
XOC XCreateOC\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
void XDestroyOC\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^);
|
||||
void XDestroyOC\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char * XSetOCValues\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^, ...);
|
||||
char * XSetOCValues\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^, ...);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char * XGetOCValues\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^, ...);
|
||||
char * XGetOCValues\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^, ...);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XOM XOMOfOC\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^);
|
||||
XOM XOMOfOC\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIoc\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the output context.
|
||||
|
|
@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ function destroys the specified output context.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XSetOCValues
|
||||
function returns NULL if no error occurred;
|
||||
function returns NULL if no error occurred;
|
||||
otherwise,
|
||||
it returns the name of the first argument that could not be set.
|
||||
An argument might not be set for any of the following reasons:
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ XCreatePixmap, XFreePixmap \- create or destroy pixmaps
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
Pixmap XCreatePixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIdepth\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIdepth\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFreePixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Pixmap \fIpixmap\fP\^);
|
||||
int XFreePixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Pixmap \fIpixmap\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies which screen the pixmap is created on.
|
||||
Specifies which screen the pixmap is created on.
|
||||
.IP \fIdepth\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the depth of the pixmap.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -74,11 +74,11 @@ The
|
|||
.B XCreatePixmap
|
||||
function creates a pixmap of the width, height, and depth you specified
|
||||
and returns a pixmap ID that identifies it.
|
||||
It is valid to pass an
|
||||
It is valid to pass an
|
||||
.B InputOnly
|
||||
window to the drawable argument.
|
||||
The width and height arguments must be nonzero,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
The depth argument must be one of the depths supported by the screen
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,11 +50,11 @@
|
|||
XCreateRegion, XSetRegion, XDestroyRegion \- create or destroy regions
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Region XCreateRegion\^(void\^);
|
||||
Region XCreateRegion\^(void\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XSetRegion\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, Region \fIr\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDestroyRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^);
|
||||
int XDestroyRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,9 +52,9 @@
|
|||
XCreateWindow, XCreateSimpleWindow, XSetWindowAttributes \- create windows and window attributes structure
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Window XCreateWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int \fIborder_width\fP\^, int \fIdepth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIclass\fP\^, Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^, unsigned long \fIvaluemask\fP\^, XSetWindowAttributes *\fIattributes\fP\^);
|
||||
Window XCreateWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int \fIborder_width\fP\^, int \fIdepth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIclass\fP\^, Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^, unsigned long \fIvaluemask\fP\^, XSetWindowAttributes *\fIattributes\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Window XCreateSimpleWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int \fIborder_width\fP\^, unsigned long \fIborder\fP\^, unsigned long \fIbackground\fP\^);
|
||||
Window XCreateSimpleWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int \fIborder_width\fP\^, unsigned long \fIborder\fP\^, unsigned long \fIbackground\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIattributes\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the structure from which the values (as specified by the value mask)
|
||||
|
|
@ -73,15 +73,15 @@ Specifies the created window's class.
|
|||
You can pass
|
||||
.BR InputOutput ,
|
||||
.BR InputOnly ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR CopyFromParent .
|
||||
A class of
|
||||
A class of
|
||||
.B CopyFromParent
|
||||
means the class
|
||||
is taken from the parent.
|
||||
.IP \fIdepth\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the window's depth.
|
||||
A depth of
|
||||
A depth of
|
||||
.B CopyFromParent
|
||||
means the depth is taken from the parent.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -96,32 +96,32 @@ If valuemask is zero,
|
|||
the attributes are ignored and are not referenced.
|
||||
.IP \fIvisual\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the visual type.
|
||||
A visual of
|
||||
A visual of
|
||||
.B CopyFromParent
|
||||
means the visual type is taken from the
|
||||
means the visual type is taken from the
|
||||
parent.
|
||||
.IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the width and height, which are the created window's inside dimensions
|
||||
Specify the width and height, which are the created window's inside dimensions
|
||||
and do not include the created window's borders.
|
||||
.IP \fIx\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are the top-left outside
|
||||
corner of the window's
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are the top-left outside
|
||||
corner of the window's
|
||||
borders and are relative to the inside of the parent window's borders.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XCreateWindow
|
||||
function creates an unmapped subwindow for a specified parent window,
|
||||
returns the window ID of the created window,
|
||||
function creates an unmapped subwindow for a specified parent window,
|
||||
returns the window ID of the created window,
|
||||
and causes the X server to generate a
|
||||
.B CreateNotify
|
||||
event.
|
||||
The created window is placed on top in the stacking order
|
||||
The created window is placed on top in the stacking order
|
||||
with respect to siblings.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The coordinate system has the X axis horizontal and the Y axis vertical
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Coordinates are integral,
|
|||
in terms of pixels,
|
||||
and coincide with pixel centers.
|
||||
Each window and pixmap has its own coordinate system.
|
||||
For a window,
|
||||
For a window,
|
||||
the origin is inside the border at the inside, upper-left corner.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The border_width for an
|
||||
|
|
@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ or a
|
|||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
The depth need not be the same as the parent,
|
||||
but the parent must not be a window of class
|
||||
but the parent must not be a window of class
|
||||
.BR InputOnly ,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
|
|
@ -167,11 +167,11 @@ The created window is not yet displayed (mapped) on the user's display.
|
|||
To display the window, call
|
||||
.BR XMapWindow .
|
||||
The new window initially uses the same cursor as
|
||||
its parent.
|
||||
its parent.
|
||||
A new cursor can be defined for the new window by calling
|
||||
.BR XDefineCursor .
|
||||
.IN "Cursor" "Initial State"
|
||||
.IN "XDefineCursor"
|
||||
.IN "XDefineCursor"
|
||||
The window will not be visible on the screen unless it and all of its
|
||||
ancestors are mapped and it is not obscured by any of its ancestors.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ subwindow for a specified parent window, returns the
|
|||
window ID of the created window, and causes the X server to generate a
|
||||
.B CreateNotify
|
||||
event.
|
||||
The created window is placed on top in the stacking order with respect to
|
||||
The created window is placed on top in the stacking order with respect to
|
||||
siblings.
|
||||
Any part of the window that extends outside its parent window is clipped.
|
||||
The border_width for an
|
||||
|
|
@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ window must be zero, or a
|
|||
error results.
|
||||
.B XCreateSimpleWindow
|
||||
inherits its depth, class, and visual from its parent.
|
||||
All other window attributes, except background and border,
|
||||
All other window attributes, except background and border,
|
||||
have their default values.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XCreateSimpleWindow
|
||||
|
|
@ -389,10 +389,10 @@ alternatives can generate this error.
|
|||
A value for a Window argument does not name a defined Window.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
XChangeWindowAttributes(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XConfigureWindow(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XConfigureWindow(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
.EEfineCursor(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
.EEstroyWindow(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XMapWindow(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
.EEstroyWindow(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XMapWindow(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XRaiseWindow(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
XUnmapWindow(__libmansuffix__)
|
||||
.br
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,15 +92,15 @@ dispatchers.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The parent member is set to the created window's parent.
|
||||
The window member specifies the created window.
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the created window's coordinates relative
|
||||
to the parent window's origin and indicate the position of the upper-left
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the created window's coordinates relative
|
||||
to the parent window's origin and indicate the position of the upper-left
|
||||
outside corner of the created window.
|
||||
The width and height members are set to the inside size of the created window
|
||||
The width and height members are set to the inside size of the created window
|
||||
(not including the border) and are always nonzero.
|
||||
The border_width member is set to the width of the created window's border, in pixels.
|
||||
The override_redirect member is set to the override-redirect attribute of the
|
||||
window.
|
||||
Window manager clients normally should ignore this window
|
||||
Window manager clients normally should ignore this window
|
||||
if the override_redirect member is
|
||||
.BR True .
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
int mode; /\&* NotifyNormal, NotifyGrab, NotifyUngrab */
|
||||
int detail;
|
||||
/\&*
|
||||
* NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
|
||||
* NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
|
||||
* NotifyNonlinear,NotifyNonlinearVirtual
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Bool same_screen; /\&* same screen flag */
|
||||
|
|
@ -107,10 +107,10 @@ The window member is set to the window on which the
|
|||
.B EnterNotify
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B LeaveNotify
|
||||
event was generated and is referred to as the event window.
|
||||
This is the window used by the X server to report the event,
|
||||
event was generated and is referred to as the event window.
|
||||
This is the window used by the X server to report the event,
|
||||
and is relative to the root
|
||||
window on which the event occurred.
|
||||
window on which the event occurred.
|
||||
The root member is set to the root window of the screen
|
||||
on which the event occurred.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -123,19 +123,19 @@ Otherwise, the X server sets the subwindow member to
|
|||
.BR None .
|
||||
For an
|
||||
.B EnterNotify
|
||||
event, if a child of the event window contains the final pointer position,
|
||||
event, if a child of the event window contains the final pointer position,
|
||||
the subwindow component is set to that child or
|
||||
.BR None .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The time member is set to the time when the event was generated
|
||||
and is expressed in milliseconds.
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the coordinates of the pointer position in
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the coordinates of the pointer position in
|
||||
the event window.
|
||||
This position is always the pointer's final position,
|
||||
not its initial position.
|
||||
If the event window is on the same
|
||||
screen as the root window, x and y are the pointer coordinates
|
||||
relative to the event window's origin.
|
||||
relative to the event window's origin.
|
||||
Otherwise, x and y are set to zero.
|
||||
The x_root and y_root members are set to the pointer's coordinates relative to the
|
||||
root window's origin at the time of the event.
|
||||
|
|
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ the event window is not the focus window or an inferior of the focus window.
|
|||
The state member is set to indicate the state of the pointer buttons and
|
||||
modifier keys just prior to the
|
||||
event.
|
||||
The X server can set this member to the bitwise inclusive OR of one
|
||||
The X server can set this member to the bitwise inclusive OR of one
|
||||
or more of the button or modifier key masks:
|
||||
.BR Button1Mask ,
|
||||
.BR Button2Mask ,
|
||||
|
|
@ -184,10 +184,10 @@ or more of the button or modifier key masks:
|
|||
.BR Mod4Mask ,
|
||||
.BR Mod5Mask .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The mode member is set to indicate whether the events are normal events,
|
||||
The mode member is set to indicate whether the events are normal events,
|
||||
pseudo-motion events
|
||||
when a grab activates, or pseudo-motion events when a grab deactivates.
|
||||
The X server can set this member to
|
||||
The X server can set this member to
|
||||
.BR NotifyNormal ,
|
||||
.BR NotifyGrab ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ XDefineCursor, XUndefineCursor \- define cursors
|
|||
int XDefineCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Cursor
|
||||
\fIcursor\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUndefineCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
int XUndefineCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIcursor\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the cursor that is to be displayed or
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
|
|||
XDestroyWindow, XDestroySubwindows \- destroy windows
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDestroyWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
int XDestroyWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDestroySubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
int XDestroySubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ the window itself.
|
|||
The ordering among siblings and across subhierarchies is not otherwise
|
||||
constrained.
|
||||
If the window you specified is a root window, no windows are destroyed.
|
||||
Destroying a mapped window will generate
|
||||
Destroying a mapped window will generate
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events on other windows that were obscured by the window being destroyed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ error.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XDestroySubwindows
|
||||
function destroys all inferior windows of the specified window,
|
||||
function destroys all inferior windows of the specified window,
|
||||
in bottom-to-top stacking order.
|
||||
It causes the X server to generate a
|
||||
.B DestroyNotify
|
||||
|
|
@ -96,13 +96,13 @@ event for each window.
|
|||
If any mapped
|
||||
subwindows were actually destroyed,
|
||||
.B XDestroySubwindows
|
||||
causes the X server to generate
|
||||
causes the X server to generate
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events on the specified window.
|
||||
This is much more efficient than deleting many windows
|
||||
one at a time because much of the work need be performed only once for all
|
||||
of the windows, rather than for each window.
|
||||
The subwindows should never be referenced again.
|
||||
The subwindows should never be referenced again.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XDestroySubwindows
|
||||
can generate a
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ dispatchers.
|
|||
The event member is set either to the destroyed window or to its parent,
|
||||
depending on whether
|
||||
.B StructureNotify
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B SubstructureNotify
|
||||
was selected.
|
||||
The window member is set to the window that is destroyed.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ XDrawArc, XDrawArcs, XArc \- draw arcs and arc structure
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawArc\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
|
||||
int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^, int \fIangle1\fP\^, int \fIangle2\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^, int \fIangle1\fP\^, int \fIangle2\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawArcs\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
|
||||
XArc *\fIarcs\fP\^, int \fInarcs\fP\^);
|
||||
XArc *\fIarcs\fP\^, int \fInarcs\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIangle1\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the start of the arc relative to the three-o'clock position
|
||||
|
|
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ arc, in units of degrees * 64.
|
|||
.IP \fIarcs\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies an array of arcs.
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -94,41 +94,41 @@ Specify the width and height, which are the major and minor axes of the arc.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
|
||||
origin of the drawable
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
|
||||
origin of the drawable
|
||||
and specify the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
.EQ
|
||||
delim %%
|
||||
.EN
|
||||
.B XDrawArc
|
||||
draws a single circular or elliptical arc, and
|
||||
draws a single circular or elliptical arc, and
|
||||
.B XDrawArcs
|
||||
draws multiple circular or elliptical arcs.
|
||||
Each arc is specified by a rectangle and two angles.
|
||||
Each arc is specified by a rectangle and two angles.
|
||||
The center of the circle or ellipse is the center of the
|
||||
rectangle, and the major and minor axes are specified by the width and height.
|
||||
Positive angles indicate counterclockwise motion,
|
||||
and negative angles indicate clockwise motion.
|
||||
If the magnitude of angle2 is greater than 360 degrees,
|
||||
Positive angles indicate counterclockwise motion,
|
||||
and negative angles indicate clockwise motion.
|
||||
If the magnitude of angle2 is greater than 360 degrees,
|
||||
.B XDrawArc
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B XDrawArcs
|
||||
truncates it to 360 degrees.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For an arc specified as %[ ~x, ~y, ~width , ~height, ~angle1, ~angle2 ]%,
|
||||
the origin of the major and minor axes is at
|
||||
% [ x +^ {width over 2} , ~y +^ {height over 2} ]%,
|
||||
and the infinitely thin path describing the entire circle or ellipse
|
||||
intersects the horizontal axis at % [ x, ~y +^ {height over 2} ]% and
|
||||
For an arc specified as %[ ~x, ~y, ~width , ~height, ~angle1, ~angle2 ]%,
|
||||
the origin of the major and minor axes is at
|
||||
% [ x +^ {width over 2} , ~y +^ {height over 2} ]%,
|
||||
and the infinitely thin path describing the entire circle or ellipse
|
||||
intersects the horizontal axis at % [ x, ~y +^ {height over 2} ]% and
|
||||
% [ x +^ width , ~y +^ { height over 2 }] %
|
||||
and intersects the vertical axis at % [ x +^ { width over 2 } , ~y ]% and
|
||||
and intersects the vertical axis at % [ x +^ { width over 2 } , ~y ]% and
|
||||
% [ x +^ { width over 2 }, ~y +^ height ]%.
|
||||
These coordinates can be fractional
|
||||
and so are not truncated to discrete coordinates.
|
||||
The path should be defined by the ideal mathematical path.
|
||||
For a wide line with line-width lw,
|
||||
the bounding outlines for filling are given
|
||||
The path should be defined by the ideal mathematical path.
|
||||
For a wide line with line-width lw,
|
||||
the bounding outlines for filling are given
|
||||
by the two infinitely thin paths consisting of all points whose perpendicular
|
||||
distance from the path of the circle/ellipse is equal to lw/2
|
||||
(which may be a fractional value).
|
||||
|
|
@ -160,37 +160,37 @@ l l.
|
|||
%2 pi% for normal-angle in the range % [ {3 pi} over 2 , ~2 pi ]%
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For any given arc,
|
||||
.B XDrawArc
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B XDrawArcs
|
||||
do not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
If two arcs join correctly and if the line-width is greater than zero
|
||||
and the arcs intersect,
|
||||
For any given arc,
|
||||
.B XDrawArc
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B XDrawArcs
|
||||
do not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
Otherwise,
|
||||
If two arcs join correctly and if the line-width is greater than zero
|
||||
and the arcs intersect,
|
||||
.B XDrawArc
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B XDrawArcs
|
||||
do not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
Otherwise,
|
||||
the intersecting pixels of intersecting arcs are drawn multiple times.
|
||||
Specifying an arc with one endpoint and a clockwise extent draws the same pixels
|
||||
as specifying the other endpoint and an equivalent counterclockwise extent,
|
||||
except as it affects joins.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the last point in one arc coincides with the first point in the following
|
||||
arc, the two arcs will join correctly.
|
||||
If the first point in the first arc coincides with the last point in the last
|
||||
If the last point in one arc coincides with the first point in the following
|
||||
arc, the two arcs will join correctly.
|
||||
If the first point in the first arc coincides with the last point in the last
|
||||
arc, the two arcs will join correctly.
|
||||
By specifying one axis to be zero, a horizontal or vertical line can be
|
||||
drawn.
|
||||
Angles are computed based solely on the coordinate system and ignore the
|
||||
aspect ratio.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, line-width, line-style, cap-style, join-style,
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, line-width, line-style, cap-style, join-style,
|
||||
fill-style, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XDrawArc
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,14 +52,14 @@ XDrawImageString, XDrawImageString16 \- draw image text
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawImageString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIlength\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIlength\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawImageString16\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XChar2b *\fIstring\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIlength\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIlength\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -72,8 +72,8 @@ Specifies the character string.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
|
||||
origin of the specified drawable
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
|
||||
origin of the specified drawable
|
||||
and define the origin of the first character.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ The
|
|||
function is similar to
|
||||
.B XDrawImageString
|
||||
except that it uses 2-byte or 16-bit characters.
|
||||
Both functions also use both the foreground and background pixels
|
||||
Both functions also use both the foreground and background pixels
|
||||
of the GC in the destination.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The effect is first to fill a
|
||||
|
|
@ -106,11 +106,11 @@ font-ascent + font-descent
|
|||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The overall-width, font-ascent, and font-descent
|
||||
are as would be returned by
|
||||
are as would be returned by
|
||||
.B XQueryTextExtents
|
||||
using gc and string.
|
||||
The function and fill-style defined in the GC are ignored for these functions.
|
||||
The effective function is
|
||||
The function and fill-style defined in the GC are ignored for these functions.
|
||||
The effective function is
|
||||
.BR GXcopy ,
|
||||
and the effective fill-style is
|
||||
.BR FillSolid .
|
||||
|
|
@ -120,8 +120,8 @@ and used with
|
|||
.BR XDrawImageString ,
|
||||
each byte is used as a byte2 with a byte1 of zero.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
plane-mask, foreground, background, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
plane-mask, foreground, background, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XDrawImageString
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,22 +51,22 @@ XDrawLine, XDrawLines, XDrawSegments, XSegment \- draw lines, polygons, and line
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawLine\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
|
||||
int \fIx1\fP\^, int \fIy1\fP\^, int \fIx2\fP\^, int \fIy2\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int \fIx1\fP\^, int \fIy1\fP\^, int \fIx2\fP\^, int \fIy2\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawLines\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawSegments\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XSegment *\fIsegments\fP\^, int \fInsegments\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XSegment *\fIsegments\fP\^, int \fInsegments\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the GC.
|
||||
.IP \fImode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the coordinate mode.
|
||||
Specifies the coordinate mode.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B CoordModeOrigin
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
|
@ -96,28 +96,28 @@ The
|
|||
function uses the components of the specified GC to
|
||||
draw a line between the specified set of points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2).
|
||||
It does not perform joining at coincident endpoints.
|
||||
For any given line,
|
||||
For any given line,
|
||||
.B XDrawLine
|
||||
does not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
|
||||
If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XDrawLines
|
||||
function uses the components of the specified GC to draw
|
||||
npoints\-1 lines between each pair of points (point[i], point[i+1])
|
||||
function uses the components of the specified GC to draw
|
||||
npoints\-1 lines between each pair of points (point[i], point[i+1])
|
||||
in the array of
|
||||
.B XPoint
|
||||
structures.
|
||||
It draws the lines in the order listed in the array.
|
||||
The lines join correctly at all intermediate points, and if the first and last
|
||||
points coincide, the first and last lines also join correctly.
|
||||
For any given line,
|
||||
For any given line,
|
||||
.B XDrawLines
|
||||
does not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
If thin (zero line-width) lines intersect,
|
||||
If thin (zero line-width) lines intersect,
|
||||
the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
|
||||
If wide lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn only once, as though
|
||||
the entire
|
||||
the entire
|
||||
.B PolyLine
|
||||
protocol request were a single, filled shape.
|
||||
.B CoordModeOrigin
|
||||
|
|
@ -128,18 +128,18 @@ treats all coordinates after the first as relative to the previous point.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XDrawSegments
|
||||
function draws multiple, unconnected lines.
|
||||
For each segment,
|
||||
function draws multiple, unconnected lines.
|
||||
For each segment,
|
||||
.B XDrawSegments
|
||||
draws a
|
||||
line between (x1, y1) and (x2, y2).
|
||||
It draws the lines in the order listed in the array of
|
||||
.B XSegment
|
||||
structures and does not perform joining at coincident endpoints.
|
||||
For any given line,
|
||||
For any given line,
|
||||
.B XDrawSegments
|
||||
does not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
|
||||
does not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
All three functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, line-width,
|
||||
|
|
@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ The
|
|||
.B XDrawLines
|
||||
function also uses the join-style GC component.
|
||||
All three functions also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.BR XDrawLine ,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,19 +51,19 @@ XDrawPoint, XDrawPoints, XPoint \- draw points and points structure
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawPoint\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawPoints\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the GC.
|
||||
.IP \fImode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the coordinate mode.
|
||||
Specifies the coordinate mode.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B CoordModeOrigin
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Specify the x and y coordinates where you want the point drawn.
|
|||
The
|
||||
.B XDrawPoint
|
||||
function uses the foreground pixel and function components of the
|
||||
GC to draw a single point into the specified drawable;
|
||||
GC to draw a single point into the specified drawable;
|
||||
.B XDrawPoints
|
||||
draws multiple points this way.
|
||||
.B CoordModeOrigin
|
||||
|
|
@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ foreground, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
|||
can generate
|
||||
.BR BadDrawable ,
|
||||
.BR BadGC ,
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
.B XDrawPoints
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ XDrawRectangle, XDrawRectangles, XRectangle \- draw rectangles and rectangles st
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawRectangle\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned
|
||||
int \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
int \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawRectangles\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XRectangle \fIrectangles\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fInrectangles\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XRectangle \fIrectangles\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fInrectangles\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -83,25 +83,25 @@ The
|
|||
and
|
||||
.B XDrawRectangles
|
||||
functions draw the outlines of the specified rectangle or rectangles as
|
||||
if a five-point
|
||||
if a five-point
|
||||
.B PolyLine
|
||||
protocol request were specified for each rectangle:
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
[x,y] [x+width,y] [x+width,y+height] [x,y+height] [x,y]
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For the specified rectangle or rectangles,
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For the specified rectangle or rectangles,
|
||||
these functions do not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
.B XDrawRectangles
|
||||
draws the rectangles in the order listed in the array.
|
||||
If rectangles intersect,
|
||||
the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, line-width,
|
||||
line-style, cap-style, join-style, fill-style,
|
||||
line-style, cap-style, join-style, fill-style,
|
||||
subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XDrawRectangle
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,14 +52,14 @@ XDrawString, XDrawString16 \- draw text characters
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIlength\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIlength\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawString16\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XChar2b *\fIstring\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIlength\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIlength\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -72,8 +72,8 @@ Specifies the character string.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
|
||||
origin of the specified drawable
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
|
||||
origin of the specified drawable
|
||||
and define the origin of the first character.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Each character image, as defined by the font in the GC, is treated as an
|
||||
|
|
@ -84,11 +84,11 @@ and used with
|
|||
.BR XDrawString16 ,
|
||||
each byte is used as a byte2 with a byte1 of zero.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
and tile-stipple-y-origin.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XDrawString
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ XDrawText, XDrawText16, XTextItem, XTextItem16 \- draw polytext text and text dr
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawText\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
|
||||
int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XTextItem *\fIitems\fP\^, int \fInitems\fP\^);
|
||||
int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XTextItem *\fIitems\fP\^, int \fInitems\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDrawText16\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XTextItem16 *\fIitems\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fInitems\fP\^);
|
||||
\fInitems\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ Specifies the number of text items in the array.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin
|
||||
of the specified drawable
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin
|
||||
of the specified drawable
|
||||
and define the origin of the first character.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -83,12 +83,12 @@ except that it uses 2-byte or 16-bit characters.
|
|||
Both functions allow complex spacing and font shifts between counted strings.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Each text item is processed in turn.
|
||||
A font member other than
|
||||
A font member other than
|
||||
.B None
|
||||
in an item causes the font to be stored in the GC
|
||||
and used for subsequent text.
|
||||
and used for subsequent text.
|
||||
A text element delta specifies an additional change
|
||||
in the position along the x axis before the string is drawn.
|
||||
in the position along the x axis before the string is drawn.
|
||||
The delta is always added to the character origin
|
||||
and is not dependent on any characteristics of the font.
|
||||
Each character image, as defined by the font in the GC, is treated as an
|
||||
|
|
@ -99,16 +99,16 @@ If a text item generates a
|
|||
error, the previous text items may have been drawn.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For fonts defined with linear indexing rather than 2-byte matrix indexing,
|
||||
each
|
||||
each
|
||||
.B XChar2b
|
||||
structure is interpreted as a 16-bit number with byte1 as the
|
||||
structure is interpreted as a 16-bit number with byte1 as the
|
||||
most significant byte.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, font, subwindow-mode,
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, font, subwindow-mode,
|
||||
clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
and tile-stipple-y-origin.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XDrawText
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,14 +50,14 @@
|
|||
XEmptyRegion, XEqualRegion, XPointInRegion, XRectInRegion \- determine if regions are empty or equal
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XEmptyRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool XEmptyRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XEqualRegion\^(\^Region \fIr1\fP\^, Region \fIr2\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool XEqualRegion\^(\^Region \fIr1\fP\^, Region \fIr2\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XPointInRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool XPointInRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XRectInRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned
|
||||
int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIr\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the region.
|
||||
|
|
@ -66,18 +66,18 @@ Specifies the region.
|
|||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIr2\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the two regions.
|
||||
.ds Wh
|
||||
.ds Wh
|
||||
.IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the width and height, which define the rectangle.
|
||||
.ds Xy
|
||||
.ds Xy
|
||||
.IP \fIx\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the point
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the point
|
||||
or the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ if the two regions have the same offset, size, and shape.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XPointInRegion
|
||||
function returns
|
||||
function returns
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
if the point (x, y) is contained in the region r.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
|
|||
.SH NAME
|
||||
XErrorEvent \- X error event structure
|
||||
.SH STRUCTURES
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XErrorEvent
|
||||
structure contains:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
When you receive this event,
|
||||
the structure members are set as follows.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The serial member is the number of requests, starting from one,
|
||||
sent over the network connection since it was opened.
|
||||
It is the number that was the value of
|
||||
The serial member is the number of requests, starting from one,
|
||||
sent over the network connection since it was opened.
|
||||
It is the number that was the value of
|
||||
.B NextRequest
|
||||
immediately before the failing call was made.
|
||||
immediately before the failing call was made.
|
||||
The request_code member is a protocol request
|
||||
of the procedure that failed, as defined in
|
||||
of the procedure that failed, as defined in
|
||||
.hN X11/Xproto.h .
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
AllPlanes(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ events that are to follow.
|
|||
If count is zero, no more
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events follow for this window.
|
||||
However, if count is nonzero, at least that number of
|
||||
However, if count is nonzero, at least that number of
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events (and possibly more) follow for this window.
|
||||
Simple applications that do not want to optimize redisplay by distinguishing
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
|
|||
XExtentsOfFontSet \- obtain the maximum extents structure for a font set
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XFontSetExtents *XExtentsOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
XFontSetExtents *XExtentsOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIfont_set\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the font set.
|
||||
|
|
@ -62,13 +62,13 @@ function returns an
|
|||
structure for the fonts used by the Xmb and Xwc layers
|
||||
for the given font set.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XFontSetExtents
|
||||
structure is owned by Xlib and should not be modified
|
||||
or freed by the client.
|
||||
It will be freed by a call to
|
||||
It will be freed by a call to
|
||||
.B XFreeFontSet
|
||||
with the associated
|
||||
with the associated
|
||||
.BR XFontSet .
|
||||
Until freed, its contents will not be modified by Xlib.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,21 +52,21 @@ XFillRectangle, XFillRectangles, XFillPolygon, XFillArc, XFillArcs \- fill recta
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XFillRectangle\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned
|
||||
int \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
int \fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFillRectangles\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIrectangles\fP\^, int \fInrectangles\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIrectangles\fP\^, int \fInrectangles\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFillPolygon\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
|
||||
\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fIshape\fP\^,
|
||||
int \fImode\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFillArc\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
|
||||
int XFillArc\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
|
||||
int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^, int \fIangle1\fP\^, int \fIangle2\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^, int \fIangle1\fP\^, int \fIangle2\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFillArcs\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
|
||||
XArc *\fIarcs\fP\^, int \fInarcs\fP\^);
|
||||
XArc *\fIarcs\fP\^, int \fInarcs\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIangle1\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the start of the arc relative to the three-o'clock position
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,13 +77,13 @@ arc, in units of degrees * 64.
|
|||
.IP \fIarcs\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies an array of arcs.
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the GC.
|
||||
.IP \fImode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the coordinate mode.
|
||||
Specifies the coordinate mode.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B CoordModeOrigin
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
|
@ -100,17 +100,17 @@ Specifies an array of points.
|
|||
Specifies an array of rectangles.
|
||||
.IP \fIshape\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a shape that helps the server to improve performance.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.BR Complex ,
|
||||
.BR Convex ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR Nonconvex .
|
||||
.ds Wh
|
||||
.ds Wh
|
||||
.IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of the
|
||||
Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of the
|
||||
rectangle to be filled or the major and minor axes of the arc.
|
||||
.IP \fIx\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
|
|
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ The
|
|||
and
|
||||
.B XFillRectangles
|
||||
functions fill the specified rectangle or rectangles
|
||||
as if a four-point
|
||||
as if a four-point
|
||||
.B FillPolygon
|
||||
protocol request were specified for each rectangle:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -136,20 +136,20 @@ Each function uses the x and y coordinates,
|
|||
width and height dimensions, and GC you specify.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XFillRectangles
|
||||
fills the rectangles in the order listed in the array.
|
||||
fills the rectangles in the order listed in the array.
|
||||
For any given rectangle,
|
||||
.B XFillRectangle
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B XFillRectangles
|
||||
do not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
do not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
If rectangles intersect, the intersecting pixels are
|
||||
drawn multiple times.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, subwindow-mode,
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, subwindow-mode,
|
||||
clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
and tile-stipple-y-origin.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XFillRectangle
|
||||
|
|
@ -175,12 +175,12 @@ and
|
|||
.B CoordModePrevious
|
||||
treats all coordinates after the first as relative to the previous point.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Depending on the specified shape, the following occurs:
|
||||
Depending on the specified shape, the following occurs:
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If shape is
|
||||
.BR Complex ,
|
||||
the path may self-intersect.
|
||||
Note that contiguous coincident points in the path are not treated
|
||||
the path may self-intersect.
|
||||
Note that contiguous coincident points in the path are not treated
|
||||
as self-intersection.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If shape is
|
||||
|
|
@ -188,36 +188,36 @@ If shape is
|
|||
for every pair of points inside the polygon,
|
||||
the line segment connecting them does not intersect the path.
|
||||
If known by the client,
|
||||
specifying
|
||||
specifying
|
||||
.B Convex
|
||||
can improve performance.
|
||||
can improve performance.
|
||||
If you specify
|
||||
.B Convex
|
||||
for a path that is not convex,
|
||||
for a path that is not convex,
|
||||
the graphics results are undefined.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If shape is
|
||||
.BR Nonconvex ,
|
||||
the path does not self-intersect, but the shape is not
|
||||
wholly convex.
|
||||
If known by the client,
|
||||
specifying
|
||||
wholly convex.
|
||||
If known by the client,
|
||||
specifying
|
||||
.B Nonconvex
|
||||
instead of
|
||||
.B Complex
|
||||
may improve performance.
|
||||
may improve performance.
|
||||
If you specify
|
||||
.B Nonconvex
|
||||
for a self-intersecting path, the graphics results are undefined.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The fill-rule of the GC controls the filling behavior of
|
||||
The fill-rule of the GC controls the filling behavior of
|
||||
self-intersecting polygons.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
This function uses these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, fill-rule, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
This function uses these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, fill-rule, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
It also uses these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
It also uses these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
and tile-stipple-y-origin.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XFillPolygon
|
||||
|
|
@ -229,35 +229,35 @@ and
|
|||
.B BadValue
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For each arc,
|
||||
For each arc,
|
||||
.B XFillArc
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B XFillArcs
|
||||
fills the region closed by the infinitely thin path
|
||||
described by the specified arc and, depending on the
|
||||
arc-mode specified in the GC, one or two line segments.
|
||||
For
|
||||
described by the specified arc and, depending on the
|
||||
arc-mode specified in the GC, one or two line segments.
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR ArcChord ,
|
||||
the single line segment joining the endpoints of the arc is used.
|
||||
For
|
||||
the single line segment joining the endpoints of the arc is used.
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR ArcPieSlice ,
|
||||
the two line segments joining the endpoints of the arc with the center
|
||||
point are used.
|
||||
point are used.
|
||||
.B XFillArcs
|
||||
fills the arcs in the order listed in the array.
|
||||
For any given arc,
|
||||
fills the arcs in the order listed in the array.
|
||||
For any given arc,
|
||||
.B XFillArc
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B XFillArcs
|
||||
do not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
If regions intersect,
|
||||
do not draw a pixel more than once.
|
||||
If regions intersect,
|
||||
the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, arc-mode, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
Both functions use these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, fill-style, arc-mode, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
|
||||
clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
|
||||
and tile-stipple-y-origin.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XFillArc
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
|
|||
XFilterEvent \- filter X events for an input method
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XFilterEvent\^(\^XEvent *\fIevent\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool XFilterEvent\^(\^XEvent *\fIevent\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIevent\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the event to filter.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,16 +50,16 @@
|
|||
XFlush, XSync, XEventsQueued, XPending \- handle output buffer or event queue
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFlush\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int XFlush\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XSync\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Bool \fIdiscard\fP\^);
|
||||
int XSync\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Bool \fIdiscard\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XEventsQueued\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
|
||||
int XEventsQueued\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XPending\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int XPending\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdiscard\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether
|
||||
.B XSync
|
||||
discards all events on the event queue.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -96,14 +96,14 @@ Any errors generated must be handled by the error handler.
|
|||
For each protocol error received by Xlib,
|
||||
.B XSync
|
||||
calls the client application's error handling routine (see section 11.8.2).
|
||||
Any events generated by the server are enqueued into the library's
|
||||
Any events generated by the server are enqueued into the library's
|
||||
event queue.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Finally, if you passed
|
||||
Finally, if you passed
|
||||
.BR False ,
|
||||
.B XSync
|
||||
does not discard the events in the queue.
|
||||
If you passed
|
||||
If you passed
|
||||
.BR True ,
|
||||
.B XSync
|
||||
discards all events in the queue,
|
||||
|
|
@ -113,34 +113,34 @@ was called.
|
|||
Client applications seldom need to call
|
||||
.BR XSync .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If mode is
|
||||
If mode is
|
||||
.BR QueuedAlready ,
|
||||
.B XEventsQueued
|
||||
returns the number of events
|
||||
already in the event queue (and never performs a system call).
|
||||
If mode is
|
||||
If mode is
|
||||
.BR QueuedAfterFlush ,
|
||||
.B XEventsQueued
|
||||
returns the number of events already in the queue if the number is nonzero.
|
||||
If there are no events in the queue,
|
||||
If there are no events in the queue,
|
||||
.B XEventsQueued
|
||||
flushes the output buffer,
|
||||
flushes the output buffer,
|
||||
attempts to read more events out of the application's connection,
|
||||
and returns the number read.
|
||||
If mode is
|
||||
If mode is
|
||||
.BR QueuedAfterReading ,
|
||||
.B XEventsQueued
|
||||
returns the number of events already in the queue if the number is nonzero.
|
||||
If there are no events in the queue,
|
||||
returns the number of events already in the queue if the number is nonzero.
|
||||
If there are no events in the queue,
|
||||
.B XEventsQueued
|
||||
attempts to read more events out of the application's connection
|
||||
attempts to read more events out of the application's connection
|
||||
without flushing the output buffer and returns the number read.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XEventsQueued
|
||||
always returns immediately without I/O if there are events already in the
|
||||
queue.
|
||||
.B XEventsQueued
|
||||
with mode
|
||||
with mode
|
||||
.B QueuedAfterFlush
|
||||
is identical in behavior to
|
||||
.BR XPending .
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -65,9 +65,9 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
int mode; /\&* NotifyNormal, NotifyGrab, NotifyUngrab */
|
||||
int detail;
|
||||
/\&*
|
||||
* NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
|
||||
* NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
|
||||
* NotifyNonlinear,NotifyNonlinearVirtual, NotifyPointer,
|
||||
* NotifyPointerRoot, NotifyDetailNone
|
||||
* NotifyPointerRoot, NotifyDetailNone
|
||||
*/
|
||||
} XFocusChangeEvent;
|
||||
typedef XFocusChangeEvent XFocusInEvent;
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,27 +101,27 @@ The window member is set to the window on which the
|
|||
or
|
||||
.B FocusOut
|
||||
event was generated.
|
||||
This is the window used by the X server to report the event.
|
||||
The mode member is set to indicate whether the focus events
|
||||
are normal focus events,
|
||||
This is the window used by the X server to report the event.
|
||||
The mode member is set to indicate whether the focus events
|
||||
are normal focus events,
|
||||
focus events while grabbed,
|
||||
focus events
|
||||
when a grab activates, or focus events when a grab deactivates.
|
||||
The X server can set the mode member to
|
||||
The X server can set the mode member to
|
||||
.BR NotifyNormal ,
|
||||
.BR NotifyWhileGrabbed ,
|
||||
.BR NotifyGrab ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR NotifyUngrab .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
All
|
||||
All
|
||||
.B FocusOut
|
||||
events caused by a window unmap are generated after any
|
||||
.B UnmapNotify
|
||||
event; however, the X protocol does not constrain the ordering of
|
||||
event; however, the X protocol does not constrain the ordering of
|
||||
.B FocusOut
|
||||
events with respect to
|
||||
generated
|
||||
generated
|
||||
.BR EnterNotify ,
|
||||
.BR LeaveNotify ,
|
||||
.BR VisibilityNotify ,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -60,33 +60,33 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
} XFontSetExtents;
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XRectangle
|
||||
structures used to return font set metrics are the usual Xlib screen-oriented
|
||||
structures used to return font set metrics are the usual Xlib screen-oriented
|
||||
rectangles
|
||||
with x, y giving the upper left corner, and width and height always positive.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The max_ink_extent member gives the maximum extent, over all drawable characters, of
|
||||
the rectangles that bound the character glyph image drawn in the
|
||||
foreground color, relative to a constant origin.
|
||||
See
|
||||
See
|
||||
.B XmbTextExtents
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B XwcTextExtents
|
||||
for detailed semantics.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The max_logical_extent member gives the maximum extent,
|
||||
over all drawable characters, of the rectangles
|
||||
over all drawable characters, of the rectangles
|
||||
that specify minimum spacing to other graphical features,
|
||||
relative to a constant origin.
|
||||
Other graphical features drawn by the client, for example,
|
||||
a border surrounding the text, should not intersect this rectangle.
|
||||
The max_logical_extent member should be used to compute minimum
|
||||
The max_logical_extent member should be used to compute minimum
|
||||
interline spacing and the minimum area that must be allowed
|
||||
in a text field to draw a given number of arbitrary characters.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Due to context-dependent rendering,
|
||||
appending a given character to a string may change
|
||||
appending a given character to a string may change
|
||||
the string's extent by an amount other than that character's
|
||||
individual extent.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,17 +51,17 @@ XFontsOfFontSet, XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet, XLocaleOfFontSet, XContextDependent
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFontsOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, XFontStruct
|
||||
***\fIfont_struct_list_return\fP\^, char ***\fIfont_name_list_return\fP\^);
|
||||
***\fIfont_struct_list_return\fP\^, char ***\fIfont_name_list_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
char *XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XLocaleOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
char *XLocaleOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XContextDependentDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool XContextDependentDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XContextualDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool XContextualDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XDirectionalDependentDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool XDirectionalDependentDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIfont_set\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the font set.
|
||||
|
|
@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Returns the list of font structs.
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XFontsOfFontSet
|
||||
function returns a list of one or more
|
||||
function returns a list of one or more
|
||||
.B XFontStructs
|
||||
and font names for the fonts used by the Xmb and Xwc layers
|
||||
for the given font set.
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,30 +88,30 @@ structures and font names is returned as the value of the function.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
Because it is not guaranteed that a given character will be imaged using a
|
||||
single font glyph,
|
||||
there is no provision for mapping a character or default string
|
||||
to the font properties, font ID, or direction hint for the font
|
||||
there is no provision for mapping a character or default string
|
||||
to the font properties, font ID, or direction hint for the font
|
||||
for the character.
|
||||
The client may access the
|
||||
The client may access the
|
||||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
list to obtain these values for all the fonts currently in use.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Xlib does not guarantee that fonts are loaded from the server
|
||||
at the creation of an
|
||||
at the creation of an
|
||||
.BR XFontSet .
|
||||
Xlib may choose to cache font data, loading it only as needed to draw text
|
||||
Xlib may choose to cache font data, loading it only as needed to draw text
|
||||
or compute text dimensions.
|
||||
Therefore, existence of the per_char metrics in the
|
||||
Therefore, existence of the per_char metrics in the
|
||||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
structures in the
|
||||
.B XFontStructSet
|
||||
is undefined.
|
||||
Also, note that all properties in the
|
||||
Also, note that all properties in the
|
||||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
structures are in the STRING encoding.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
and font name lists are owned by Xlib
|
||||
and font name lists are owned by Xlib
|
||||
and should not be modified or freed by the client.
|
||||
They will be freed by a call to
|
||||
.B XFreeFontSet
|
||||
|
|
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Until freed, their contents will not be modified by Xlib.
|
|||
The
|
||||
.B XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet
|
||||
function returns the original base font name list supplied
|
||||
by the client when the
|
||||
by the client when the
|
||||
.B XFontSet
|
||||
was created.
|
||||
A null-terminated string containing a list of
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ comma-separated font names is returned
|
|||
as the value of the function.
|
||||
White space may appear immediately on either side of separating commas.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B XCreateFontSet
|
||||
obtained an XLFD name from the font properties for the font specified
|
||||
by a non-XLFD base name, the
|
||||
|
|
@ -139,9 +139,9 @@ function will return the XLFD name instead of the non-XLFD base name.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The base font name list is owned by Xlib and should not be modified or
|
||||
freed by the client.
|
||||
It will be freed by a call to
|
||||
It will be freed by a call to
|
||||
.B XFreeFontSet
|
||||
with the associated
|
||||
with the associated
|
||||
.BR XFontSet .
|
||||
Until freed, its contents will not be modified by Xlib.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ The returned locale name string is owned by Xlib
|
|||
and should not be modified or freed by the client.
|
||||
It may be freed by a call to
|
||||
.B XFreeFontSet
|
||||
with the associated
|
||||
with the associated
|
||||
.BR XFontSet .
|
||||
Until freed, it will not be modified by Xlib.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
|
|||
.SH NAME
|
||||
XFree \- free client data
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
int XFree\^(\^void *\fIdata\fP\^);
|
||||
int XFree\^(\^void *\fIdata\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdata\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the data that are to be freed.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -54,12 +54,12 @@ XGetVisualInfo, XMatchVisualInfo, XVisualIDFromVisual, XVisualInfo \- obtain vis
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
XVisualInfo *XGetVisualInfo\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, long
|
||||
\fIvinfo_mask\fP\^, XVisualInfo *\fIvinfo_template\fP\^, int
|
||||
*\fInitems_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fInitems_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XMatchVisualInfo\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIscreen\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIdepth\fP\^, int \fIclass\fP\^, XVisualInfo *\fIvinfo_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIdepth\fP\^, int \fIclass\fP\^, XVisualInfo *\fIvinfo_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual\^(\^Visual *\^\fIvisual\fP\^);
|
||||
VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual\^(\^Visual *\^\fIvisual\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIclass\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the class of the screen.
|
||||
|
|
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ structures.
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XGetVisualInfo
|
||||
function returns a list of visual structures that have attributes
|
||||
function returns a list of visual structures that have attributes
|
||||
equal to the attributes specified by vinfo_template.
|
||||
If no visual structures match the template using the specified vinfo_mask,
|
||||
.B XGetVisualInfo
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,24 +53,24 @@ XGetWindowAttributes, XGetGeometry, XWindowAttributes \- get current window attr
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XGetWindowAttributes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
|
||||
XWindowAttributes *\fIwindow_attributes_return\fP\^);
|
||||
XWindowAttributes *\fIwindow_attributes_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XGetGeometry\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, Window
|
||||
*\fIroot_return\fP\^, int *\fIx_return\fP\^, int *\fIy_return\fP\^, unsigned
|
||||
int *\fIwidth_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
*\fIborder_width_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIdepth_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIborder_width_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIdepth_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIborder_width_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the border width in pixels.
|
||||
Returns the border width in pixels.
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable, which can be a window or a pixmap.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable, which can be a window or a pixmap.
|
||||
.IP \fIdepth_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the depth of the drawable (bits per pixel for the object).
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIroot_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the root window.
|
||||
.ds Wi
|
||||
.ds Wi
|
||||
.IP \fIw\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the window whose current attributes you want to obtain.
|
||||
.IP \fIwidth_return\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ structure.
|
|||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Return the x and y coordinates that define the location of the drawable.
|
||||
For a window,
|
||||
For a window,
|
||||
these coordinates specify the upper-left outer corner relative to
|
||||
its parent's origin.
|
||||
For pixmaps, these coordinates are always zero.
|
||||
|
|
@ -149,10 +149,10 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the upper-left outer
|
||||
corner relative to the parent window's origin.
|
||||
The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window,
|
||||
The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window,
|
||||
not including the border.
|
||||
The border_width member is set to the window's border width in pixels.
|
||||
The depth member is set to the depth of the window
|
||||
The depth member is set to the depth of the window
|
||||
(that is, bits per pixel for the object).
|
||||
The visual member is a pointer to the screen's associated
|
||||
.B Visual
|
||||
|
|
@ -233,27 +233,27 @@ For additional information on gravity,
|
|||
see section 3.3.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The backing_store member is set to indicate how the X server should maintain
|
||||
the contents of a window
|
||||
and can be
|
||||
the contents of a window
|
||||
and can be
|
||||
.BR WhenMapped ,
|
||||
.BR Always ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR NotUseful .
|
||||
The backing_planes member is set to indicate (with bits set to 1) which bit
|
||||
planes of the window hold dynamic data that must be preserved in backing_stores
|
||||
The backing_planes member is set to indicate (with bits set to 1) which bit
|
||||
planes of the window hold dynamic data that must be preserved in backing_stores
|
||||
and during save_unders.
|
||||
The backing_pixel member is set to indicate what values to use
|
||||
The backing_pixel member is set to indicate what values to use
|
||||
for planes not set in backing_planes.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The save_under member is set to
|
||||
The save_under member is set to
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
The colormap member is set to the colormap for the specified window and can be
|
||||
a colormap ID or
|
||||
a colormap ID or
|
||||
.BR None .
|
||||
The map_installed member is set to indicate whether the colormap is
|
||||
currently installed and can be
|
||||
The map_installed member is set to indicate whether the colormap is
|
||||
currently installed and can be
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
|
|
@ -265,22 +265,22 @@ or
|
|||
.B IsUnviewable
|
||||
is used if the window is mapped but some ancestor is unmapped.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The all_event_masks member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of all event
|
||||
The all_event_masks member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of all event
|
||||
masks selected on the window by all clients.
|
||||
The your_event_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of all event
|
||||
The your_event_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of all event
|
||||
masks selected by the querying client.
|
||||
The do_not_propagate_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of the
|
||||
The do_not_propagate_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of the
|
||||
set of events that should not propagate.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The override_redirect member is set to indicate whether this window overrides
|
||||
structure control facilities and can be
|
||||
structure control facilities and can be
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
Window manager clients should ignore the window if this member is
|
||||
.BR True .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The screen member is set to a screen pointer that gives you a back pointer
|
||||
The screen member is set to a screen pointer that gives you a back pointer
|
||||
to the correct screen.
|
||||
This makes it easier to obtain the screen information without
|
||||
having to loop over the root window fields to see which field matches.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -54,27 +54,27 @@ int XGetWindowProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Atom
|
|||
\fIproperty\fP\^, long \fIlong_offset\fP\^, long \fIlong_length\fP\^, Bool
|
||||
\fIdelete\fP\^, Atom \fIreq_type\fP\^, Atom *\fIactual_type_return\fP\^, int
|
||||
*\fIactual_format_return\fP\^, unsigned long *\fInitems_return\fP\^, unsigned
|
||||
long *\fIbytes_after_return\fP\^, unsigned char **\fIprop_return\fP\^);
|
||||
long *\fIbytes_after_return\fP\^, unsigned char **\fIprop_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Atom *XListProperties\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, int
|
||||
*\fInum_prop_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fInum_prop_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XChangeProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Atom
|
||||
\fIproperty\fP\^, Atom \fItype\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned char *\fIdata\fP\^, int \fInelements\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned char *\fIdata\fP\^, int \fInelements\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XRotateWindowProperties\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
|
||||
Atom \fIproperties\fP\^[]\^, int \fInum_prop\fP\^, int \fInpositions\fP\^);
|
||||
Atom \fIproperties\fP\^[]\^, int \fInum_prop\fP\^, int \fInpositions\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDeleteProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Atom
|
||||
\fIproperty\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIproperty\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIactual_format_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the actual format of the property.
|
||||
.IP \fIactual_type_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the atom identifier that defines the actual type of the property.
|
||||
.IP \fIbytes_after_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the number of bytes remaining to be read in the property if
|
||||
Returns the number of bytes remaining to be read in the property if
|
||||
a partial read was performed.
|
||||
.IP \fIdata\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the property data.
|
||||
|
|
@ -90,12 +90,12 @@ This information allows the X server to correctly perform
|
|||
byte-swap operations as necessary.
|
||||
If the format is 16-bit or 32-bit,
|
||||
you must explicitly cast your data pointer to an (unsigned char *) in the call
|
||||
to
|
||||
to
|
||||
.BR XChangeProperty .
|
||||
.IP \fIlong_length\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the length in 32-bit multiples of the data to be retrieved.
|
||||
.IP \fIlong_offset\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the offset in the specified property (in 32-bit quantities)
|
||||
Specifies the offset in the specified property (in 32-bit quantities)
|
||||
where the data is to be retrieved.
|
||||
.\" Changed name of this file to prop_mode.a on 1/13/87
|
||||
.IP \fImode\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ or
|
|||
.IP \fInelements\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the number of elements of the specified data format.
|
||||
.IP \fInitems_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the actual number of 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit items
|
||||
Returns the actual number of 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit items
|
||||
stored in the prop_return data.
|
||||
.IP \fInum_prop\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the length of the properties array.
|
||||
|
|
@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Specifies the atom identifier associated with the property type or
|
|||
.IP \fItype\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the type of the property.
|
||||
The X server does not interpret the type but simply
|
||||
passes it back to an application that later calls
|
||||
passes it back to an application that later calls
|
||||
.BR XGetWindowProperty .
|
||||
.IP \fIw\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the window whose property you want to obtain, change, rotate or delete.
|
||||
|
|
@ -149,31 +149,31 @@ sets the return arguments as follows:
|
|||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If the specified property does not exist for the specified window,
|
||||
.B XGetWindowProperty
|
||||
returns
|
||||
returns
|
||||
.B None
|
||||
to actual_type_return and the value zero to
|
||||
to actual_type_return and the value zero to
|
||||
actual_format_return and bytes_after_return.
|
||||
The nitems_return argument is empty.
|
||||
In this case, the delete argument is ignored.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If the specified property exists
|
||||
If the specified property exists
|
||||
but its type does not match the specified type,
|
||||
.B XGetWindowProperty
|
||||
returns the actual property type to actual_type_return,
|
||||
the actual property format (never zero) to actual_format_return,
|
||||
returns the actual property type to actual_type_return,
|
||||
the actual property format (never zero) to actual_format_return,
|
||||
and the property length in bytes
|
||||
(even if the actual_format_return is 16 or 32)
|
||||
(even if the actual_format_return is 16 or 32)
|
||||
to bytes_after_return.
|
||||
It also ignores the delete argument.
|
||||
The nitems_return argument is empty.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If the specified property exists and either you assign
|
||||
If the specified property exists and either you assign
|
||||
.B AnyPropertyType
|
||||
to the req_type argument or the specified type matches the actual property type,
|
||||
.B XGetWindowProperty
|
||||
returns the actual property type to actual_type_return and the actual
|
||||
property format (never zero) to actual_format_return.
|
||||
It also returns a value to bytes_after_return and nitems_return, by
|
||||
property format (never zero) to actual_format_return.
|
||||
It also returns a value to bytes_after_return and nitems_return, by
|
||||
defining the following
|
||||
values:
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
|
|
@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ from zero), and its length in bytes is L.
|
|||
If the value for long_offset causes L to be negative,
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
The value of bytes_after_return is A,
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
The value of bytes_after_return is A,
|
||||
giving the number of trailing unread bytes in the stored property.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the returned format is 8, the returned data is represented as a
|
||||
|
|
@ -206,17 +206,17 @@ If the returned format is 32, the returned data is represented as a
|
|||
array and should be cast to that type to obtain the elements.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XGetWindowProperty
|
||||
always allocates one extra byte in prop_return
|
||||
(even if the property is zero length)
|
||||
always allocates one extra byte in prop_return
|
||||
(even if the property is zero length)
|
||||
and sets it to zero so that simple properties consisting of characters
|
||||
do not have to be copied into yet another string before use.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If delete is
|
||||
If delete is
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
and bytes_after_return is zero,
|
||||
and bytes_after_return is zero,
|
||||
.B XGetWindowProperty
|
||||
deletes the property
|
||||
from the window and generates a
|
||||
deletes the property
|
||||
from the window and generates a
|
||||
.B PropertyNotify
|
||||
event on the window.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ errors.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XListProperties
|
||||
function returns a pointer to an array of atom properties that are defined for
|
||||
function returns a pointer to an array of atom properties that are defined for
|
||||
the specified window or returns NULL if no properties were found.
|
||||
To free the memory allocated by this function, use
|
||||
.BR XFree .
|
||||
|
|
@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ The type and format must match the existing property value,
|
|||
or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If the property is undefined,
|
||||
If the property is undefined,
|
||||
it is treated as defined with the correct type and
|
||||
format with zero-length data.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ The lifetime of a property is not tied to the storing client.
|
|||
Properties remain until explicitly deleted, until the window is destroyed,
|
||||
or until the server resets.
|
||||
For a discussion of what happens when the connection to the X server is closed,
|
||||
see section 2.6.
|
||||
see section 2.6.
|
||||
The maximum size of a property is server dependent and can vary dynamically
|
||||
depending on the amount of memory the server has available.
|
||||
(If there is insufficient space, a
|
||||
|
|
@ -313,25 +313,25 @@ function allows you to rotate properties on a window and causes
|
|||
the X server to generate
|
||||
.B PropertyNotify
|
||||
events.
|
||||
If the property names in the properties array are viewed as being numbered
|
||||
If the property names in the properties array are viewed as being numbered
|
||||
starting from zero and if there are num_prop property names in the list,
|
||||
then the value associated with property name I becomes the value associated
|
||||
then the value associated with property name I becomes the value associated
|
||||
with property name (I + npositions) mod N for all I from zero to N \- 1.
|
||||
The effect is to rotate the states by npositions places around the virtual ring
|
||||
of property names (right for positive npositions,
|
||||
of property names (right for positive npositions,
|
||||
left for negative npositions).
|
||||
If npositions mod N is nonzero,
|
||||
the X server generates a
|
||||
.B PropertyNotify
|
||||
event for each property in the order that they are listed in the array.
|
||||
If an atom occurs more than once in the list or no property with that
|
||||
If an atom occurs more than once in the list or no property with that
|
||||
name is defined for the window,
|
||||
a
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If a
|
||||
If a
|
||||
.B BadAtom
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results,
|
||||
no properties are changed.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ XGetXCBConnection \- get the XCB connection for an Xlib Display
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
#include <X11/Xlib-xcb.h>
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
xcb_connection_t *XGetXCBConnection(Display *\fIdpy\fP);
|
||||
xcb_connection_t *XGetXCBConnection(Display *\fIdpy\fP);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdpy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,15 +49,15 @@
|
|||
.SH NAME
|
||||
XGrabButton, XUngrabButton \- grab pointer buttons
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XGrabButton\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned int \fIbutton\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned int \fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^, Bool
|
||||
\fIowner_events\fP\^, unsigned int \fIevent_mask\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIpointer_mode\fP\^, \fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^, Window \fIconfine_to\fP\^, Cursor
|
||||
\fIcursor\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIcursor\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUngrabButton\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned int \fIbutton\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned int \fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned int \fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIbutton\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the pointer button that is to be grabbed or released or
|
||||
|
|
@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid pointer event mask bits.
|
|||
Specifies the grab window.
|
||||
.IP \fIkeyboard_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies further processing of keyboard events.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B GrabModeSync
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync .
|
||||
|
|
@ -86,12 +86,12 @@ Specifies the set of keymasks or
|
|||
.BR AnyModifier .
|
||||
The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid keymask bits.
|
||||
.IP \fIowner_events\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer
|
||||
events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to the grab window
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer
|
||||
events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to the grab window
|
||||
if selected by the event mask.
|
||||
.IP \fIpointer_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies further processing of pointer events.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B GrabModeSync
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync .
|
||||
|
|
@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ The interpretation of the remaining arguments is as for
|
|||
The active grab is terminated automatically when the logical state of the
|
||||
pointer has all buttons released
|
||||
(independent of the state of the logical modifier keys),
|
||||
at which point a
|
||||
at which point a
|
||||
.B ButtonRelease
|
||||
event is reported to the grabbing window.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -134,27 +134,27 @@ may lag the physical state if device event processing is frozen.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
This request overrides all previous grabs by the same client on the same
|
||||
button/key combinations on the same window.
|
||||
A modifiers of
|
||||
A modifiers of
|
||||
.B AnyModifier
|
||||
is equivalent to issuing the grab request for all
|
||||
possible modifier combinations (including the combination of no modifiers).
|
||||
It is not required that all modifiers specified have currently assigned
|
||||
possible modifier combinations (including the combination of no modifiers).
|
||||
It is not required that all modifiers specified have currently assigned
|
||||
KeyCodes.
|
||||
A button of
|
||||
A button of
|
||||
.B AnyButton
|
||||
is equivalent to
|
||||
issuing the request for all possible buttons.
|
||||
Otherwise, it is not required that the specified button currently be assigned
|
||||
to a physical button.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If some other client has already issued a
|
||||
If some other client has already issued a
|
||||
.B XGrabButton
|
||||
with the same button/key combination on the same window, a
|
||||
.B BadAccess
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
When using
|
||||
When using
|
||||
.B AnyModifier
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR AnyButton ,
|
||||
the request fails completely,
|
||||
and a
|
||||
|
|
@ -176,13 +176,13 @@ The
|
|||
.B XUngrabButton
|
||||
function releases the passive button/key combination on the specified window if
|
||||
it was grabbed by this client.
|
||||
A modifiers of
|
||||
A modifiers of
|
||||
.B AnyModifier
|
||||
is
|
||||
equivalent to issuing
|
||||
the ungrab request for all possible modifier combinations, including
|
||||
equivalent to issuing
|
||||
the ungrab request for all possible modifier combinations, including
|
||||
the combination of no modifiers.
|
||||
A button of
|
||||
A button of
|
||||
.B AnyButton
|
||||
is equivalent to issuing the
|
||||
request for all possible buttons.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ XGrabKey, XUngrabKey \- grab keyboard keys
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XGrabKey\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIkeycode\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^, Bool \fIowner_events\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIpointer_mode\fP\^, int \fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIpointer_mode\fP\^, int \fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUngrabKey\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIkeycode\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^);
|
||||
\fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
|||
Specifies the grab window.
|
||||
.IP \fIkeyboard_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies further processing of keyboard events.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B GrabModeSync
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync .
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,11 +75,11 @@ Specifies the set of keymasks or
|
|||
.BR AnyModifier .
|
||||
The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid keymask bits.
|
||||
.IP \fIowner_events\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard events
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard events
|
||||
are to be reported as usual.
|
||||
.IP \fIpointer_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies further processing of pointer events.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B GrabModeSync
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync .
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,49 +108,49 @@ or the grab_window is a descendant of the focus window and contains the pointer.
|
|||
A passive grab on the same key combination does not exist
|
||||
on any ancestor of grab_window.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The interpretation of the remaining arguments is as for
|
||||
The interpretation of the remaining arguments is as for
|
||||
.BR XGrabKeyboard .
|
||||
The active grab is terminated automatically when the logical state of the
|
||||
keyboard has the specified key released
|
||||
(independent of the logical state of the modifier keys),
|
||||
at which point a
|
||||
at which point a
|
||||
.B KeyRelease
|
||||
event is reported to the grabbing window.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Note that the logical state of a device (as seen by client applications)
|
||||
may lag the physical state if device event processing is frozen.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
A modifiers argument of
|
||||
A modifiers argument of
|
||||
.B AnyModifier
|
||||
is equivalent to issuing the request for all
|
||||
possible modifier combinations (including the combination of no
|
||||
modifiers).
|
||||
modifiers).
|
||||
It is not required that all modifiers specified have
|
||||
currently assigned KeyCodes.
|
||||
A keycode argument of
|
||||
A keycode argument of
|
||||
.B AnyKey
|
||||
is equivalent to issuing
|
||||
the request for all possible KeyCodes.
|
||||
Otherwise, the specified keycode must be in
|
||||
the range specified by min_keycode and max_keycode in the connection
|
||||
setup,
|
||||
setup,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadValue
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If some other client has issued a
|
||||
If some other client has issued a
|
||||
.B XGrabKey
|
||||
with the same key combination on the same window, a
|
||||
with the same key combination on the same window, a
|
||||
.B BadAccess
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
When using
|
||||
.B AnyModifier
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR AnyKey ,
|
||||
the request fails completely,
|
||||
and a
|
||||
.B BadAccess
|
||||
error results (no grabs are established)
|
||||
error results (no grabs are established)
|
||||
if there is a conflicting grab for any combination.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XGrabKey
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ XGrabKeyboard, XUngrabKeyboard \- grab the keyboard
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XGrabKeyboard\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^,
|
||||
Bool \fIowner_events\fP\^, int \fIpointer_mode\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUngrabKeyboard\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
int XUngrabKeyboard\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -62,16 +62,16 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
|||
Specifies the grab window.
|
||||
.IP \fIkeyboard_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies further processing of keyboard events.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B GrabModeSync
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync .
|
||||
.IP \fIowner_events\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard events
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard events
|
||||
are to be reported as usual.
|
||||
.IP \fIpointer_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies further processing of pointer events.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B GrabModeSync
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync .
|
||||
|
|
@ -91,51 +91,51 @@ Further key events are reported only to the
|
|||
grabbing client.
|
||||
.B XGrabKeyboard
|
||||
overrides any active keyboard grab by this client.
|
||||
If owner_events is
|
||||
If owner_events is
|
||||
.BR False ,
|
||||
all generated key events are reported with
|
||||
respect to grab_window.
|
||||
If owner_events is
|
||||
respect to grab_window.
|
||||
If owner_events is
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
and if a generated
|
||||
key event would normally be reported to this client, it is reported
|
||||
normally; otherwise, the event is reported with respect to the
|
||||
grab_window.
|
||||
Both
|
||||
grab_window.
|
||||
Both
|
||||
.B KeyPress
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B KeyRelease
|
||||
events are always reported,
|
||||
independent of any event selection made by the client.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the keyboard_mode argument is
|
||||
If the keyboard_mode argument is
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync ,
|
||||
keyboard event processing continues
|
||||
as usual.
|
||||
If the keyboard is currently frozen by this client,
|
||||
as usual.
|
||||
If the keyboard is currently frozen by this client,
|
||||
then processing of keyboard events is resumed.
|
||||
If the keyboard_mode argument is
|
||||
.BR GrabModeSync ,
|
||||
the state of the keyboard (as seen by client applications) appears to freeze,
|
||||
and the X server generates no further keyboard events until the
|
||||
grabbing client issues a releasing
|
||||
grabbing client issues a releasing
|
||||
.B XAllowEvents
|
||||
call or until the keyboard grab is released.
|
||||
Actual keyboard changes are not lost while the keyboard is frozen;
|
||||
Actual keyboard changes are not lost while the keyboard is frozen;
|
||||
they are simply queued in the server for later processing.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If pointer_mode is
|
||||
If pointer_mode is
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync ,
|
||||
pointer event processing is unaffected
|
||||
by activation of the grab.
|
||||
If pointer_mode is
|
||||
by activation of the grab.
|
||||
If pointer_mode is
|
||||
.BR GrabModeSync ,
|
||||
the state of the pointer (as seen by client applications) appears to freeze,
|
||||
and the X server generates no further pointer events
|
||||
until the grabbing client issues a releasing
|
||||
the state of the pointer (as seen by client applications) appears to freeze,
|
||||
and the X server generates no further pointer events
|
||||
until the grabbing client issues a releasing
|
||||
.B XAllowEvents
|
||||
call or until the keyboard grab is released.
|
||||
Actual pointer changes are not lost while the pointer is frozen;
|
||||
Actual pointer changes are not lost while the pointer is frozen;
|
||||
they are simply queued in the server for later processing.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the keyboard is actively grabbed by some other client,
|
||||
|
|
@ -148,12 +148,12 @@ it fails and returns
|
|||
If the keyboard is frozen by an active grab of another client,
|
||||
it fails and returns
|
||||
.BR GrabFrozen .
|
||||
If the specified time is earlier than the last-keyboard-grab time
|
||||
If the specified time is earlier than the last-keyboard-grab time
|
||||
or later than the current X server time,
|
||||
it fails and returns
|
||||
.BR GrabInvalidTime .
|
||||
Otherwise, the last-keyboard-grab time is set to the specified time
|
||||
.Pn ( CurrentTime
|
||||
.Pn ( CurrentTime
|
||||
is replaced by the current X server time).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XGrabKeyboard
|
||||
|
|
@ -177,10 +177,10 @@ if the specified time is earlier than
|
|||
the last-keyboard-grab time or is later than the current X server time.
|
||||
It also generates
|
||||
.B FocusIn
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B FocusOut
|
||||
events.
|
||||
The X server automatically performs an
|
||||
The X server automatically performs an
|
||||
.B UngrabKeyboard
|
||||
request if the event window for an
|
||||
active keyboard grab becomes not viewable.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ XGrabPointer, XUngrabPointer, XChangeActivePointerGrab \- grab the pointer
|
|||
int XGrabPointer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^,
|
||||
Bool \fIowner_events\fP\^, unsigned int \fIevent_mask\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIpointer_mode\fP\^, int \fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^, Window \fIconfine_to\fP\^,
|
||||
Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUngrabPointer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
int XUngrabPointer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XChangeActivePointerGrab\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIevent_mask\fP\^, Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIevent_mask\fP\^, Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIconfine_to\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the window to confine the pointer in or
|
||||
|
|
@ -75,17 +75,17 @@ The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid pointer event mask bits.
|
|||
Specifies the grab window.
|
||||
.IP \fIkeyboard_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies further processing of keyboard events.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B GrabModeSync
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync .
|
||||
.IP \fIowner_events\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer
|
||||
events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to the grab window
|
||||
Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer
|
||||
events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to the grab window
|
||||
if selected by the event mask.
|
||||
.IP \fIpointer_mode\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies further processing of pointer events.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B GrabModeSync
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync .
|
||||
|
|
@ -102,53 +102,53 @@ if the grab was successful.
|
|||
Further pointer events are reported only to the grabbing client.
|
||||
.B XGrabPointer
|
||||
overrides any active pointer grab by this client.
|
||||
If owner_events is
|
||||
If owner_events is
|
||||
.BR False ,
|
||||
all generated pointer events
|
||||
are reported with respect to grab_window and are reported only if
|
||||
selected by event_mask.
|
||||
If owner_events is
|
||||
If owner_events is
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
and if a generated
|
||||
pointer event would normally be reported to this client,
|
||||
it is reported as usual.
|
||||
pointer event would normally be reported to this client,
|
||||
it is reported as usual.
|
||||
Otherwise, the event is reported with respect to the
|
||||
grab_window and is reported only if selected by event_mask.
|
||||
For either value of owner_events, unreported events are discarded.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the pointer_mode is
|
||||
If the pointer_mode is
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync ,
|
||||
pointer event processing continues as usual.
|
||||
If the pointer is currently frozen by this client,
|
||||
If the pointer is currently frozen by this client,
|
||||
the processing of events for the pointer is resumed.
|
||||
If the pointer_mode is
|
||||
If the pointer_mode is
|
||||
.BR GrabModeSync ,
|
||||
the state of the pointer, as seen by
|
||||
client applications,
|
||||
appears to freeze, and the X server generates no further pointer events
|
||||
until the grabbing client calls
|
||||
until the grabbing client calls
|
||||
.B XAllowEvents
|
||||
or until the pointer grab is released.
|
||||
Actual pointer changes are not lost while the pointer is frozen;
|
||||
they are simply queued in the server for later processing.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the keyboard_mode is
|
||||
If the keyboard_mode is
|
||||
.BR GrabModeAsync ,
|
||||
keyboard event processing is unaffected by activation of the grab.
|
||||
If the keyboard_mode is
|
||||
If the keyboard_mode is
|
||||
.BR GrabModeSync ,
|
||||
the state of the keyboard, as seen by
|
||||
client applications,
|
||||
appears to freeze, and the X server generates no further keyboard events
|
||||
until the grabbing client calls
|
||||
until the grabbing client calls
|
||||
.B XAllowEvents
|
||||
or until the pointer grab is released.
|
||||
Actual keyboard changes are not lost while the pointer is frozen;
|
||||
they are simply queued in the server for later processing.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If a cursor is specified, it is displayed regardless of what
|
||||
window the pointer is in.
|
||||
If
|
||||
window the pointer is in.
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B None
|
||||
is specified,
|
||||
the normal cursor for that window is displayed
|
||||
|
|
@ -158,11 +158,11 @@ otherwise, the cursor for grab_window is displayed.
|
|||
If a confine_to window is specified,
|
||||
the pointer is restricted to stay contained in that window.
|
||||
The confine_to window need have no relationship to the grab_window.
|
||||
If the pointer is not initially in the confine_to window,
|
||||
it is warped automatically to the closest edge
|
||||
just before the grab activates and enter/leave events are generated as usual.
|
||||
If the confine_to window is subsequently reconfigured,
|
||||
the pointer is warped automatically, as necessary,
|
||||
If the pointer is not initially in the confine_to window,
|
||||
it is warped automatically to the closest edge
|
||||
just before the grab activates and enter/leave events are generated as usual.
|
||||
If the confine_to window is subsequently reconfigured,
|
||||
the pointer is warped automatically, as necessary,
|
||||
to keep it contained in the window.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The time argument allows you to avoid certain circumstances that come up
|
||||
|
|
@ -170,10 +170,10 @@ if applications take a long time to respond or if there are long network
|
|||
delays.
|
||||
Consider a situation where you have two applications, both
|
||||
of which normally grab the pointer when clicked on.
|
||||
If both applications specify the timestamp from the event,
|
||||
If both applications specify the timestamp from the event,
|
||||
the second application may wake up faster and successfully grab the pointer
|
||||
before the first application.
|
||||
The first application then will get an indication that the other application
|
||||
before the first application.
|
||||
The first application then will get an indication that the other application
|
||||
grabbed the pointer before its request was processed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XGrabPointer
|
||||
|
|
@ -195,11 +195,11 @@ it fails and returns
|
|||
If the pointer is frozen by an active grab of another client,
|
||||
it fails and returns
|
||||
.BR GrabFrozen .
|
||||
If the specified time is earlier than the last-pointer-grab time or later
|
||||
If the specified time is earlier than the last-pointer-grab time or later
|
||||
than the current X server time, it fails and returns
|
||||
.BR GrabInvalidTime .
|
||||
Otherwise, the last-pointer-grab time is set to the specified time
|
||||
.Pn ( CurrentTime
|
||||
.Pn ( CurrentTime
|
||||
is replaced by the current X server time).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XGrabPointer
|
||||
|
|
@ -221,14 +221,14 @@ or from a normal button press.
|
|||
does not release the pointer if the specified
|
||||
time is earlier than the last-pointer-grab time or is later than the
|
||||
current X server time.
|
||||
It also generates
|
||||
It also generates
|
||||
.B EnterNotify
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.B LeaveNotify
|
||||
events.
|
||||
The X server performs an
|
||||
The X server performs an
|
||||
.B UngrabPointer
|
||||
request automatically if the event window or confine_to window
|
||||
request automatically if the event window or confine_to window
|
||||
for an active pointer grab becomes not viewable
|
||||
or if window reconfiguration causes the confine_to window to lie completely
|
||||
outside the boundaries of the root window.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
|
|||
XGrabServer, XUngrabServer \- grab the server
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XGrabServer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int XGrabServer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUngrabServer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
|
|
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XGrabServer
|
||||
function disables processing of requests and close downs on all other
|
||||
function disables processing of requests and close downs on all other
|
||||
connections than the one this request arrived on.
|
||||
You should not grab the X server any more than is absolutely necessary.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
|
|||
dispatchers.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Both structures have these common members: drawable, major_code, and minor_code.
|
||||
The drawable member is set to the drawable of the destination region on
|
||||
The drawable member is set to the drawable of the destination region on
|
||||
which the graphics request was to be performed.
|
||||
The major_code member is set to the graphics request initiated by the client
|
||||
and can be either
|
||||
|
|
@ -122,19 +122,19 @@ If it is
|
|||
a call to
|
||||
.B XCopyPlane
|
||||
initiated the request.
|
||||
These constants are defined in
|
||||
These constants are defined in
|
||||
.hN X11/Xproto.h .
|
||||
The minor_code member,
|
||||
like the major_code member,
|
||||
like the major_code member,
|
||||
indicates which graphics request was initiated by
|
||||
the client.
|
||||
the client.
|
||||
However, the minor_code member is not defined by the core
|
||||
X protocol and will be zero in these cases,
|
||||
X protocol and will be zero in these cases,
|
||||
although it may be used by an extension.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XGraphicsExposeEvent
|
||||
structure has these additional members: x, y, width, height, and count.
|
||||
structure has these additional members: x, y, width, height, and count.
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the drawable's origin
|
||||
and indicate the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
|
||||
The width and height members are set to the size (extent) of the rectangle.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -94,9 +94,9 @@ or
|
|||
.B SubstructureNotify
|
||||
was selected.
|
||||
The window member is set to the child window that was moved.
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the
|
||||
The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the
|
||||
new parent window's origin
|
||||
and indicate the position of the upper-left outside corner of the
|
||||
and indicate the position of the upper-left outside corner of the
|
||||
window.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
XAnyEvent(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ XIconifyWindow, XWithdrawWindow, XReconfigureWMWindow \- manipulate top-level wi
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XIconifyWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP, int
|
||||
\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XWithdrawWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XReconfigureWMWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
|
||||
int \fIscreen_number\fP\^, unsigned int \fIvalue_mask\fP\^, XWindowChanges
|
||||
*\fIvalues\fP);
|
||||
*\fIvalues\fP);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -69,19 +69,19 @@ Specifies which values are to be set using information in
|
|||
the values structure.
|
||||
This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid configure window values bits.
|
||||
.IP \fIvalues\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
.B XWindowChanges
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.IP \fIw\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the window.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XIconifyWindow
|
||||
function sends a WM_CHANGE_STATE
|
||||
function sends a WM_CHANGE_STATE
|
||||
.B ClientMessage
|
||||
event with a format of 32 and a first data element of
|
||||
event with a format of 32 and a first data element of
|
||||
.B IconicState
|
||||
(as described in section 4.1.4 of the
|
||||
(as described in section 4.1.4 of the
|
||||
\fIInter-Client Communication Conventions Manual\fP)
|
||||
and a window of w
|
||||
to the root window of the specified screen
|
||||
|
|
@ -89,27 +89,27 @@ with an event mask set to
|
|||
.BR SubstructureNotifyMask |
|
||||
.BR SubstructureRedirectMask .
|
||||
Window managers may elect to receive this message and
|
||||
if the window is in its normal state,
|
||||
if the window is in its normal state,
|
||||
may treat it as a request to change the window's state from normal to iconic.
|
||||
If the WM_CHANGE_STATE property cannot be interned,
|
||||
If the WM_CHANGE_STATE property cannot be interned,
|
||||
.B XIconifyWindow
|
||||
does not send a message and returns a zero status.
|
||||
It returns a nonzero status if the client message is sent successfully;
|
||||
otherwise, it returns a zero status.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XWithdrawWindow
|
||||
function unmaps the specified window
|
||||
and sends a synthetic
|
||||
function unmaps the specified window
|
||||
and sends a synthetic
|
||||
.B UnmapNotify
|
||||
event to the root window of the specified screen.
|
||||
Window managers may elect to receive this message
|
||||
Window managers may elect to receive this message
|
||||
and may treat it as a request to change the window's state to withdrawn.
|
||||
When a window is in the withdrawn state,
|
||||
When a window is in the withdrawn state,
|
||||
neither its normal nor its iconic representations is visible.
|
||||
It returns a nonzero status if the
|
||||
It returns a nonzero status if the
|
||||
.B UnmapNotify
|
||||
event is successfully sent;
|
||||
event is successfully sent;
|
||||
otherwise, it returns a zero status.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XWithdrawWindow
|
||||
|
|
@ -117,19 +117,19 @@ can generate a
|
|||
.B BadWindow
|
||||
error.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XReconfigureWMWindow
|
||||
function issues a
|
||||
function issues a
|
||||
.B ConfigureWindow
|
||||
request on the specified top-level window.
|
||||
If the stacking mode is changed and the request fails with a
|
||||
If the stacking mode is changed and the request fails with a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error,
|
||||
the error is trapped by Xlib and a synthetic
|
||||
error,
|
||||
the error is trapped by Xlib and a synthetic
|
||||
.B ConfigureRequestEvent
|
||||
containing the same configuration parameters is sent to the root
|
||||
containing the same configuration parameters is sent to the root
|
||||
of the specified window.
|
||||
Window managers may elect to receive this event
|
||||
Window managers may elect to receive this event
|
||||
and treat it as a request to reconfigure the indicated window.
|
||||
It returns a nonzero status if the request or event is successfully sent;
|
||||
otherwise, it returns a zero status.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ XIfEvent, XCheckIfEvent, XPeekIfEvent \- check the event queue with a predicate
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XIfEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^, Bool
|
||||
(\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
|
||||
(\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XCheckIfEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^,
|
||||
Bool (\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool (\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XPeekIfEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^,
|
||||
Bool (\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
|
||||
Bool (\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIarg\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the user-supplied argument that will be passed to the predicate procedure.
|
||||
|
|
@ -72,14 +72,14 @@ if the next event in the queue matches what you want.
|
|||
The
|
||||
.B XIfEvent
|
||||
function completes only when the specified predicate
|
||||
procedure returns
|
||||
procedure returns
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
for an event,
|
||||
for an event,
|
||||
which indicates an event in the queue matches.
|
||||
.B XIfEvent
|
||||
flushes the output buffer if it blocks waiting for additional events.
|
||||
.B XIfEvent
|
||||
removes the matching event from the queue
|
||||
removes the matching event from the queue
|
||||
and copies the structure into the client-supplied
|
||||
.B XEvent
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ When the predicate procedure finds a match,
|
|||
.B XCheckIfEvent
|
||||
copies the matched event into the client-supplied
|
||||
.B XEvent
|
||||
structure and returns
|
||||
structure and returns
|
||||
.BR True .
|
||||
(This event is removed from the queue.)
|
||||
If the predicate procedure finds no match,
|
||||
|
|
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ All earlier events stored in the queue are not discarded.
|
|||
The
|
||||
.B XPeekIfEvent
|
||||
function returns only when the specified predicate
|
||||
procedure returns
|
||||
procedure returns
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
for an event.
|
||||
After the predicate procedure finds a match,
|
||||
|
|
@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ structure without removing the event from the queue.
|
|||
.B XPeekIfEvent
|
||||
flushes the output buffer if it blocks waiting for additional events.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Each of these functions requires you to pass a predicate procedure that
|
||||
Each of these functions requires you to pass a predicate procedure that
|
||||
determines if an event matches what you want.
|
||||
Your predicate procedure must decide if the event is useful
|
||||
without calling any Xlib functions.
|
||||
|
|
@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Specifies the
|
|||
.B XEvent
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.IP \fIarg\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the argument passed in from the
|
||||
Specifies the argument passed in from the
|
||||
.BR XIfEvent ,
|
||||
.BR XCheckIfEvent ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
|
@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ or
|
|||
function.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The predicate procedure is called once for each
|
||||
event in the queue until it finds a match.
|
||||
After finding a match, the predicate procedure must return
|
||||
event in the queue until it finds a match.
|
||||
After finding a match, the predicate procedure must return
|
||||
.BR True .
|
||||
If it did not find a match, it must return
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,33 +50,33 @@
|
|||
XInitImage, XCreateImage, XGetPixel, XPutPixel, XSubImage, XAddPixel, XDestroyImage \- image utilities
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XInitImage\^(\^XImage *\fIimage\fP\^);
|
||||
Status XInitImage\^(\^XImage *\fIimage\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XImage *XCreateImage\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned int \fIdepth\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^, int \fIoffset\fP\^, char
|
||||
*\fIdata\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIbitmap_pad\fP\^, int \fIbytes_per_line\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIbitmap_pad\fP\^, int \fIbytes_per_line\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
unsigned long XGetPixel\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIy\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIy\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XPutPixel\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned long \fIpixel\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned long \fIpixel\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XImage *XSubImage\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned int \fIsubimage_width\fP\^, unsigned int \fIsubimage_height\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned int \fIsubimage_width\fP\^, unsigned int \fIsubimage_height\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XAddPixel\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, long \fIvalue\fP\^);
|
||||
int XAddPixel\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, long \fIvalue\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XDestroyImage\^(\^XImage *\^\fIximage\fP\^);
|
||||
int XDestroyImage\^(\^XImage *\^\fIximage\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIbitmap_pad\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the quantum of a scanline (8, 16, or 32).
|
||||
In other words, the start of one scanline is separated in client memory from
|
||||
the start of the next scanline by an integer multiple of this many bits.
|
||||
In other words, the start of one scanline is separated in client memory from
|
||||
the start of the next scanline by an integer multiple of this many bits.
|
||||
.IP \fIbytes_per_line\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the number of bytes in the client image between
|
||||
the start of one scanline and the start of the next.
|
||||
the start of one scanline and the start of the next.
|
||||
.IP \fIdata\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the image data.
|
||||
.IP \fIdepth\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Specifies the format for the image.
|
|||
You can pass
|
||||
.BR XYBitmap ,
|
||||
.BR XYPixmap ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR ZPixmap .
|
||||
.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
|
||||
|
|
@ -146,15 +146,15 @@ function allocates the memory needed for an
|
|||
structure for the
|
||||
specified display but does not allocate space for the image itself.
|
||||
Rather, it initializes the structure byte-order, bit-order, and bitmap-unit
|
||||
values from the display and returns a pointer to the
|
||||
values from the display and returns a pointer to the
|
||||
.B XImage
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
The red, green, and blue mask values are defined for Z format images only
|
||||
and are derived from the
|
||||
and are derived from the
|
||||
.B Visual
|
||||
structure passed in.
|
||||
Other values also are passed in.
|
||||
The offset permits the rapid displaying of the image without requiring each
|
||||
The offset permits the rapid displaying of the image without requiring each
|
||||
scanline to be shifted into position.
|
||||
If you pass a zero value in bytes_per_line,
|
||||
Xlib assumes that the scanlines are contiguous
|
||||
|
|
@ -165,9 +165,9 @@ Note that when the image is created using
|
|||
.BR XGetImage ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR XSubImage ,
|
||||
the destroy procedure that the
|
||||
the destroy procedure that the
|
||||
.B XDestroyImage
|
||||
function calls frees both the image structure
|
||||
function calls frees both the image structure
|
||||
and the data pointed to by the image structure.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The basic functions used to get a pixel, set a pixel, create a subimage,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ XInitThreads, XLockDisplay, XUnlockDisplay \- multi-threading support
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
Status XInitThreads\^(void);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
void XLockDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
void XLockDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
void XUnlockDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
void XUnlockDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ XInstallColormap, XUninstallColormap, XListInstalledColormaps \- control colorma
|
|||
int XInstallColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUninstallColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
|
||||
\fIcolormap\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIcolormap\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Colormap *XListInstalledColormaps\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window
|
||||
\fIw\fP\^, int *\fInum_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIw\fP\^, int *\fInum_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIcolormap\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the colormap.
|
||||
|
|
@ -79,11 +79,11 @@ You associated the windows with this colormap when you created them by calling
|
|||
or
|
||||
.BR XSetWindowColormap .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the specified colormap is not already an installed colormap,
|
||||
If the specified colormap is not already an installed colormap,
|
||||
the X server generates a
|
||||
.B ColormapNotify
|
||||
event on each window that has that colormap.
|
||||
In addition, for every other colormap that is installed as
|
||||
In addition, for every other colormap that is installed as
|
||||
a result of a call to
|
||||
.BR XInstallColormap ,
|
||||
the X server generates a
|
||||
|
|
@ -100,17 +100,17 @@ The
|
|||
function removes the specified colormap from the required
|
||||
list for its screen.
|
||||
As a result,
|
||||
the specified colormap might be uninstalled,
|
||||
the specified colormap might be uninstalled,
|
||||
and the X server might implicitly install or uninstall additional colormaps.
|
||||
Which colormaps get installed or uninstalled is server dependent
|
||||
except that the required list must remain installed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the specified colormap becomes uninstalled,
|
||||
If the specified colormap becomes uninstalled,
|
||||
the X server generates a
|
||||
.B ColormapNotify
|
||||
event on each window that has that colormap.
|
||||
In addition, for every other colormap that is installed or uninstalled as a
|
||||
result of a call to
|
||||
In addition, for every other colormap that is installed or uninstalled as a
|
||||
result of a call to
|
||||
.BR XUninstallColormap ,
|
||||
the X server generates a
|
||||
.B ColormapNotify
|
||||
|
|
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ error.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XListInstalledColormaps
|
||||
function returns a list of the currently installed colormaps for the screen
|
||||
function returns a list of the currently installed colormaps for the screen
|
||||
of the specified window.
|
||||
The order of the colormaps in the list is not significant
|
||||
and is no explicit indication of the required list.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,15 +51,15 @@ XInternAtom, XInternAtoms, XGetAtomName, XGetAtomNames \- create or return atom
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Atom XInternAtom\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIatom_name\fP\^, Bool
|
||||
\fIonly_if_exists\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIonly_if_exists\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XInternAtoms\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char **\fInames\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIcount\fP\^, Bool \fIonly_if_exists\fP\^, Atom *\fIatoms_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIcount\fP\^, Bool \fIonly_if_exists\fP\^, Atom *\fIatoms_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XGetAtomName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom \fIatom\fP\^);
|
||||
char *XGetAtomName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom \fIatom\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XGetAtomNames\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom *\fIatoms\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIcount\fP\^, char **\fInames_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIcount\fP\^, char **\fInames_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIatom\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the atom for the property name you want returned.
|
||||
|
|
@ -84,18 +84,18 @@ The
|
|||
.B XInternAtom
|
||||
function returns the atom identifier associated with the specified atom_name
|
||||
string.
|
||||
If only_if_exists is
|
||||
If only_if_exists is
|
||||
.BR False ,
|
||||
the atom is created if it does not exist.
|
||||
Therefore,
|
||||
.B XInternAtom
|
||||
can return
|
||||
.BR None .
|
||||
If the atom name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
|
||||
If the atom name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
|
||||
the result is implementation-dependent.
|
||||
Uppercase and lowercase matter;
|
||||
the strings \*(lqthing\*(rq, \*(lqThing\*(rq, and \*(lqthinG\*(rq
|
||||
all designate different atoms.
|
||||
the strings \*(lqthing\*(rq, \*(lqThing\*(rq, and \*(lqthinG\*(rq
|
||||
all designate different atoms.
|
||||
The atom will remain defined even after the client's connection closes.
|
||||
It will become undefined only when the last connection to
|
||||
the X server closes.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,23 +51,23 @@ XIntersectRegion, XUnionRegion, XUnionRectWithRegion, XSubtractRegion, XXorRegio
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XIntersectRegion\^(\^Region \fIsra\fP\^, Region \fIsrb\fP\^, Region
|
||||
\fIdr_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIdr_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUnionRegion\^(\^Region \fIsra\fP\^, Region \fIsrb\fP\^, Region
|
||||
\fIdr_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIdr_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUnionRectWithRegion\^(\^XRectangle *\fIrectangle\fP\^, Region
|
||||
\fIsrc_region\fP\^, Region \fIdest_region_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIsrc_region\fP\^, Region \fIdest_region_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XSubtractRegion\^(\^Region \fIsra\fP\^, Region \fIsrb\fP\^, Region
|
||||
\fIdr_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIdr_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XXorRegion\^(\^Region \fIsra\fP\^, Region \fIsrb\fP\^, Region
|
||||
\fIdr_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIdr_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XOffsetRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIdx\fP\^, int \fIdy\fP\^);
|
||||
int XOffsetRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIdx\fP\^, int \fIdy\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XShrinkRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIdx\fP\^, int \fIdy\fP\^);
|
||||
int XShrinkRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIdx\fP\^, int \fIdy\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdest_region_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the destination region.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ typedef struct {
|
|||
Display *display; /\&* Display the event was read from */
|
||||
Window window;
|
||||
char key_vector[32];
|
||||
} XKeymapEvent;
|
||||
} XKeymapEvent;
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
When you receive this event,
|
||||
|
|
@ -89,10 +89,10 @@ dispatchers.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The window member is not used but is present to aid some toolkits.
|
||||
The key_vector member is set to the bit vector of the keyboard.
|
||||
Each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding key
|
||||
Each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding key
|
||||
is currently pressed.
|
||||
The vector is represented as 32 bytes.
|
||||
Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
|
||||
Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
|
||||
with the least significant bit in the byte representing key 8N.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
XAnyEvent(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ XListFonts, XFreeFontNames, XListFontsWithInfo, XFreeFontInfo \- obtain or free
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char **XListFonts\^(\^Display *\^\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\^\fIpattern\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fImaxnames\fP\^, int *\^\fIactual_count_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fImaxnames\fP\^, int *\^\fIactual_count_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFreeFontNames\^(\^char *\fIlist\fP\^[\^]\^);
|
||||
int XFreeFontNames\^(\^char *\fIlist\fP\^[\^]\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char **XListFontsWithInfo\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIpattern\fP\^,
|
||||
int \fImaxnames\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^, XFontStruct
|
||||
**\fIinfo_return\fP\^);
|
||||
**\fIinfo_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFreeFontInfo(\^char **\fInames\fP\^, XFontStruct *\fIfree_info\fP, int
|
||||
\fIactual_count\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIactual_count\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIactual_count\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the actual number of font names.
|
||||
|
|
@ -84,12 +84,12 @@ Specifies the maximum number of names to be returned.
|
|||
Specifies the list of font names.
|
||||
|
||||
.IP \fIpattern\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the null-terminated pattern string that can contain wildcard
|
||||
Specifies the null-terminated pattern string that can contain wildcard
|
||||
characters.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XListFonts
|
||||
function returns an array of available font names
|
||||
function returns an array of available font names
|
||||
(as controlled by the font search path; see
|
||||
.BR XSetFontPath )
|
||||
that match the string you passed to the pattern argument.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -60,19 +60,19 @@
|
|||
XLoadFont, XQueryFont, XLoadQueryFont, XFreeFont, XGetFontProperty, XUnloadFont, XCharStruct, XFontProp, XChar2b, XFontStruct \- load or unload fonts and font metric structures
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Font XLoadFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIname\fP\^);
|
||||
Font XLoadFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIname\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XFontStruct *XQueryFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIfont_ID\fP\^);
|
||||
XFontStruct *XQueryFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIfont_ID\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XFontStruct *XLoadQueryFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char
|
||||
*\fIname\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIname\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XFreeFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XFontStruct *\fIfont_struct\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XGetFontProperty\^(\^XFontStruct *\fIfont_struct\fP\^, Atom \fIatom\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned long *\fIvalue_return\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned long *\fIvalue_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XUnloadFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Font \fIfont\fP\^);
|
||||
int XUnloadFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Font \fIfont\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIatom\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the atom for the property name you want returned.
|
||||
|
|
@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
|||
.IP \fIfont\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the font.
|
||||
.IP \fIfont_ID\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the font ID or the
|
||||
Specifies the font ID or the
|
||||
.B GContext
|
||||
ID.
|
||||
.IP \fIfont_struct\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -102,21 +102,21 @@ the result is implementation-dependent.
|
|||
Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
|
||||
When the characters \*(lq?\*(rq and \*(lq\*(rq are used in a font name, a
|
||||
pattern match is performed and any matching font is used.
|
||||
In the pattern,
|
||||
the \*(lq?\*(rq character will match any single character,
|
||||
In the pattern,
|
||||
the \*(lq?\*(rq character will match any single character,
|
||||
and the \*(lq*\*(rq character will match any number of characters.
|
||||
A structured format for font names is specified in the X Consortium standard
|
||||
A structured format for font names is specified in the X Consortium standard
|
||||
\fIX Logical Font Description Conventions\fP.
|
||||
If
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B XLoadFont
|
||||
was unsuccessful at loading the specified font,
|
||||
a
|
||||
was unsuccessful at loading the specified font,
|
||||
a
|
||||
.B BadName
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
Fonts are not associated with a particular screen
|
||||
Fonts are not associated with a particular screen
|
||||
and can be stored as a component
|
||||
of any GC.
|
||||
When the font is no longer needed, call
|
||||
When the font is no longer needed, call
|
||||
.BR XUnloadFont .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.B XLoadFont
|
||||
|
|
@ -132,9 +132,9 @@ function returns a pointer to the
|
|||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
structure, which contains information associated with the font.
|
||||
You can query a font or the font stored in a GC.
|
||||
The font ID stored in the
|
||||
The font ID stored in the
|
||||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
structure will be the
|
||||
structure will be the
|
||||
.B GContext
|
||||
ID, and you need to be careful when using this ID in other functions
|
||||
(see
|
||||
|
|
@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ returns NULL.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XFreeFont
|
||||
function deletes the association between the font resource ID and the specified
|
||||
function deletes the association between the font resource ID and the specified
|
||||
font and frees the
|
||||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
|
|
@ -181,11 +181,11 @@ error.
|
|||
Given the atom for that property,
|
||||
the
|
||||
.B XGetFontProperty
|
||||
function returns the value of the specified font property.
|
||||
function returns the value of the specified font property.
|
||||
.B XGetFontProperty
|
||||
also returns
|
||||
also returns
|
||||
.B False
|
||||
if the property was not defined or
|
||||
if the property was not defined or
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
if it was defined.
|
||||
A set of predefined atoms exists for font properties,
|
||||
|
|
@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ byte2 defines the range of defined columns of the font.
|
|||
Single byte/character fonts have one row defined, and the byte2 range
|
||||
specified in the structure defines a range of characters.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The bounding box of a character is defined by the
|
||||
The bounding box of a character is defined by the
|
||||
.B XCharStruct
|
||||
of that character.
|
||||
When characters are absent from a font,
|
||||
|
|
@ -293,22 +293,22 @@ only the information in the
|
|||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
min and max bounds are used.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The members of the
|
||||
The members of the
|
||||
.B XFontStruct
|
||||
have the following semantics:
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
The direction member can be either
|
||||
The direction member can be either
|
||||
.B FontLeftToRight
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR FontRightToLeft .
|
||||
It is just a hint as to whether most
|
||||
It is just a hint as to whether most
|
||||
.B XCharStruct
|
||||
elements
|
||||
have a positive
|
||||
.Pn ( FontLeftToRight )
|
||||
or a negative
|
||||
elements
|
||||
have a positive
|
||||
.Pn ( FontLeftToRight )
|
||||
or a negative
|
||||
.Pn ( FontRightToLeft )
|
||||
character width
|
||||
character width
|
||||
metric.
|
||||
The core protocol defines no support for vertical text.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
|
|
@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ of the per_char array, and max_char_or_byte2 specifies the linear character
|
|||
index of the last element.
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
If either min_byte1 or max_byte1 are nonzero, both
|
||||
min_char_or_byte2 and max_char_or_byte2 are less than 256,
|
||||
min_char_or_byte2 and max_char_or_byte2 are less than 256,
|
||||
and the 2-byte character index values corresponding to the
|
||||
per_char array element N (counting from 0) are:
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
|
|
@ -333,26 +333,26 @@ where:
|
|||
\e\e = integer modulus
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If the per_char pointer is NULL,
|
||||
If the per_char pointer is NULL,
|
||||
all glyphs between the first and last character indexes
|
||||
inclusive have the same information,
|
||||
as given by both min_bounds and max_bounds.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If all_chars_exist is
|
||||
If all_chars_exist is
|
||||
.BR True ,
|
||||
all characters in the per_char array have nonzero bounding boxes.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
The default_char member specifies the character that will be used when an
|
||||
undefined or nonexistent character is printed.
|
||||
undefined or nonexistent character is printed.
|
||||
The default_char is a 16-bit character (not a 2-byte character).
|
||||
For a font using 2-byte matrix format,
|
||||
For a font using 2-byte matrix format,
|
||||
the default_char has byte1 in the most-significant byte
|
||||
and byte2 in the least significant byte.
|
||||
If the default_char itself specifies an undefined or nonexistent character,
|
||||
If the default_char itself specifies an undefined or nonexistent character,
|
||||
no printing is performed for an undefined or nonexistent character.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
The min_bounds and max_bounds members contain the most extreme values of
|
||||
each individual
|
||||
each individual
|
||||
.B XCharStruct
|
||||
component over all elements of this array
|
||||
(and ignore nonexistent characters).
|
||||
|
|
@ -383,16 +383,16 @@ baseline that is used for determining line spacing.
|
|||
Specific characters may extend beyond this.
|
||||
.IP \(bu 5
|
||||
If the baseline is at Y-coordinate y,
|
||||
the logical extent of the font is inclusive between the Y-coordinate
|
||||
the logical extent of the font is inclusive between the Y-coordinate
|
||||
values (y \- font.ascent) and (y + font.descent \- 1).
|
||||
Typically,
|
||||
the minimum interline spacing between rows of text is given
|
||||
by ascent + descent.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For a character origin at [x,y],
|
||||
the bounding box of a character (that is,
|
||||
the bounding box of a character (that is,
|
||||
the smallest rectangle that encloses the character's shape)
|
||||
described in terms of
|
||||
described in terms of
|
||||
.B XCharStruct
|
||||
components is a rectangle with its upper-left corner at:
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,17 +50,17 @@
|
|||
XLookupKeysym, XRefreshKeyboardMapping, XLookupString, XRebindKeysym \- handle keyboard input events in Latin-1
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
KeySym XLookupKeysym(\^XKeyEvent *\fIkey_event\fP\^, int \fIindex\fP\^);
|
||||
KeySym XLookupKeysym(\^XKeyEvent *\fIkey_event\fP\^, int \fIindex\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XRefreshKeyboardMapping(\^XMappingEvent *\fIevent_map\fP\^);
|
||||
int XRefreshKeyboardMapping(\^XMappingEvent *\fIevent_map\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XLookupString(\^XKeyEvent *\fIevent_struct\fP\^, char
|
||||
*\fIbuffer_return\fP\^, int \fIbytes_buffer\fP\^, KeySym
|
||||
*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, XComposeStatus *\fIstatus_in_out\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, XComposeStatus *\fIstatus_in_out\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XRebindKeysym(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, KeySym \fIkeysym\fP\^, KeySym
|
||||
\fIlist\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fImod_count\fP\^, unsigned char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fInum_bytes\fP\^);
|
||||
\fInum_bytes\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIbuffer_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the translated characters.
|
||||
|
|
@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ or
|
|||
.IP \fIindex\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the index into the KeySyms list for the event's KeyCode.
|
||||
.IP \fIkey_event\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
Specifies the
|
||||
.B KeyPress
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B KeyRelease
|
||||
|
|
@ -96,11 +96,11 @@ Specifies the KeySyms to be used as modifiers.
|
|||
.IP \fImod_count\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the number of modifiers in the modifier list.
|
||||
.IP \fIstatus_in_out\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies or returns the
|
||||
Specifies or returns the
|
||||
.B XComposeStatus
|
||||
structure or NULL.
|
||||
.IP \fIstring\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the string that is copied and will be returned by
|
||||
Specifies the string that is copied and will be returned by
|
||||
.BR XLookupString .
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ was selected.
|
|||
The window member is set to the window that was mapped.
|
||||
The override_redirect member is set to the override-redirect attribute
|
||||
of the window.
|
||||
Window manager clients normally should ignore this window
|
||||
Window manager clients normally should ignore this window
|
||||
if the override-redirect attribute is
|
||||
.BR True ,
|
||||
because these events usually are generated from pop-ups,
|
||||
|
|
@ -155,12 +155,12 @@ If it is
|
|||
the keyboard mapping was changed.
|
||||
If it is
|
||||
.BR MappingPointer ,
|
||||
the pointer button mapping was changed.
|
||||
The first_keycode and count members are set only
|
||||
the pointer button mapping was changed.
|
||||
The first_keycode and count members are set only
|
||||
if the request member was set to
|
||||
.BR MappingKeyboard .
|
||||
The number in first_keycode represents the first number in the range
|
||||
of the altered mapping,
|
||||
The number in first_keycode represents the first number in the range
|
||||
of the altered mapping,
|
||||
and count represents the number of keycodes altered.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
XAnyEvent(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,11 +50,11 @@
|
|||
XMapWindow, XMapRaised, XMapSubwindows \- map windows
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XMapWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
int XMapWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XMapRaised\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
int XMapRaised\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XMapSubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
int XMapSubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ If the window becomes viewable and no earlier contents for it are remembered,
|
|||
the X server tiles the window with its background.
|
||||
If the window's background is undefined,
|
||||
the existing screen contents are not
|
||||
altered, and the X server generates zero or more
|
||||
altered, and the X server generates zero or more
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events.
|
||||
If backing-store was maintained while the window was unmapped, no
|
||||
If backing-store was maintained while the window was unmapped, no
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events
|
||||
are generated.
|
||||
If backing-store will now be maintained,
|
||||
If backing-store will now be maintained,
|
||||
a full-window exposure is always generated.
|
||||
Otherwise, only visible regions may be reported.
|
||||
Similar tiling and exposure take place for any newly viewable inferiors.
|
||||
|
|
@ -109,25 +109,25 @@ If the window is an
|
|||
.B InputOutput
|
||||
window,
|
||||
.B XMapWindow
|
||||
generates
|
||||
generates
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events on each
|
||||
events on each
|
||||
.B InputOutput
|
||||
window that it causes to be displayed.
|
||||
If the client maps and paints the window
|
||||
and if the client begins processing events,
|
||||
If the client maps and paints the window
|
||||
and if the client begins processing events,
|
||||
the window is painted twice.
|
||||
To avoid this,
|
||||
first ask for
|
||||
first ask for
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
events and then map the window,
|
||||
so the client processes input events as usual.
|
||||
The event list will include
|
||||
The event list will include
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
for each
|
||||
window that has appeared on the screen.
|
||||
window that has appeared on the screen.
|
||||
The client's normal response to
|
||||
an
|
||||
an
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
event should be to repaint the window.
|
||||
This method usually leads to simpler programs and to proper interaction
|
||||
|
|
@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ error.
|
|||
The
|
||||
.B XMapSubwindows
|
||||
.IN "XMapSubwindows"
|
||||
function maps all subwindows for a specified window in top-to-bottom stacking
|
||||
function maps all subwindows for a specified window in top-to-bottom stacking
|
||||
order.
|
||||
The X server generates
|
||||
.B Expose
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,27 +50,27 @@
|
|||
XNextEvent, XPeekEvent, XWindowEvent, XCheckWindowEvent, XMaskEvent, XCheckMaskEvent, XCheckTypedEvent, XCheckTypedWindowEvent \- select events by type
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XNextEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
int XNextEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XPeekEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
int XPeekEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XWindowEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, long
|
||||
\fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XCheckWindowEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, long
|
||||
\fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XMaskEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, long \fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent
|
||||
*\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XCheckMaskEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, long \fIevent_mask\fP\^,
|
||||
XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XCheckTypedEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIevent_type\fP\^,
|
||||
XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XCheckTypedWindowEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
|
||||
int \fIevent_type\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
int \fIevent_type\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ flushes the output buffer and blocks until one is received.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XCheckWindowEvent
|
||||
function searches the event queue and then the events available
|
||||
function searches the event queue and then the events available
|
||||
on the server connection for the first event that matches the specified window
|
||||
and event mask.
|
||||
If it finds a match,
|
||||
|
|
@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ and the output buffer will have been flushed.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XMaskEvent
|
||||
function searches the event queue for the events associated with the
|
||||
function searches the event queue for the events associated with the
|
||||
specified mask.
|
||||
When it finds a match,
|
||||
.B XMaskEvent
|
||||
|
|
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ and the output buffer will have been flushed.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XCheckTypedEvent
|
||||
function searches the event queue and then any events available
|
||||
function searches the event queue and then any events available
|
||||
on the server connection for the first event that matches the specified type.
|
||||
If it finds a match,
|
||||
.B XCheckTypedEvent
|
||||
|
|
@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ and the output buffer will have been flushed.
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XCheckTypedWindowEvent
|
||||
function searches the event queue and then any events available
|
||||
function searches the event queue and then any events available
|
||||
on the server connection for the first event that matches the specified
|
||||
type and window.
|
||||
If it finds a match,
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -49,14 +49,14 @@
|
|||
.SH NAME
|
||||
XNoOp \- No Operation
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
int XNoOp\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int XNoOp\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XNoOp
|
||||
function sends a
|
||||
function sends a
|
||||
.B NoOperation
|
||||
protocol request to the X server,
|
||||
thereby exercising the connection.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,28 +50,28 @@
|
|||
XOpenDisplay, XCloseDisplay \- connect or disconnect to X server
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Display *XOpenDisplay\^(\^char *\fIdisplay_name\fP\^);
|
||||
Display *XOpenDisplay\^(\^char *\fIdisplay_name\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XCloseDisplay\^(Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
int XCloseDisplay\^(Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay_name\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the hardware display name, which determines the display
|
||||
and communications domain to be used.
|
||||
On a POSIX-conformant system, if the display_name is NULL,
|
||||
it defaults to the value of the DISPLAY environment variable.
|
||||
On a POSIX-conformant system, if the display_name is NULL,
|
||||
it defaults to the value of the DISPLAY environment variable.
|
||||
.IN "Environment" "DISPLAY"
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XOpenDisplay
|
||||
function returns a
|
||||
function returns a
|
||||
.B Display
|
||||
structure that serves as the
|
||||
connection to the X server and that contains all the information
|
||||
about that X server.
|
||||
.B XOpenDisplay
|
||||
connects your application to the X server through TCP
|
||||
connects your application to the X server through TCP
|
||||
or DECnet communications protocols,
|
||||
or through some local inter-process communication protocol.
|
||||
.IN "Protocol" "TCP"
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,21 +92,21 @@ A particular Xlib implementation can support many more of these transport
|
|||
mechanisms.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.IN "Display"
|
||||
If successful,
|
||||
If successful,
|
||||
.B XOpenDisplay
|
||||
returns a pointer to a
|
||||
returns a pointer to a
|
||||
.B Display
|
||||
structure,
|
||||
which is defined in
|
||||
which is defined in
|
||||
.hN X11/Xlib.h .
|
||||
If
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B XOpenDisplay
|
||||
does not succeed, it returns NULL.
|
||||
After a successful call to
|
||||
.BR XOpenDisplay ,
|
||||
all of the screens in the display can be used by the client.
|
||||
The screen number specified in the display_name argument is returned
|
||||
by the
|
||||
The screen number specified in the display_name argument is returned
|
||||
by the
|
||||
.B DefaultScreen
|
||||
macro (or the
|
||||
.B XDefaultScreen
|
||||
|
|
@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ You can access elements of the
|
|||
and
|
||||
.B Screen
|
||||
structures only by using the information macros or functions.
|
||||
For information about using macros and functions to obtain information from
|
||||
For information about using macros and functions to obtain information from
|
||||
the
|
||||
.B Display
|
||||
structure,
|
||||
|
|
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ or other resources that the client has created
|
|||
on this display, unless the close-down mode of the resource has been changed
|
||||
(see
|
||||
.BR XSetCloseDownMode ).
|
||||
Therefore, these windows, resource IDs, and other resources should never be
|
||||
Therefore, these windows, resource IDs, and other resources should never be
|
||||
referenced again or an error will be generated.
|
||||
Before exiting, you should call
|
||||
.B XCloseDisplay
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,25 +51,25 @@ XOpenIM, XCloseIM, XSetIMValues, XGetIMValues, XDisplayOfIM, XLocaleOfIM, XRegis
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XIM XOpenIM\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XrmDatabase \fIdb\fP\^, char
|
||||
*\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XCloseIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
|
||||
Status XCloseIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XSetIMValues\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...);
|
||||
char *XSetIMValues\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XGetIMValues\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...);
|
||||
char *XGetIMValues\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Display *XDisplayOfIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
|
||||
Display *XDisplayOfIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XLocaleOfIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
|
||||
char *XLocaleOfIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XrmDatabase
|
||||
\fIdb\fP\^, char *\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^, XIDProc
|
||||
\fIcallback\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIcallback\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Bool XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^,
|
||||
XrmDatabase \fIdb\fP\^, char *\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^,
|
||||
XIDProc \fIcallback\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
|
||||
XIDProc \fIcallback\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIcallback\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Specifies the variable length argument list to set or get XIM values.
|
|||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XOpenIM
|
||||
function opens an input method,
|
||||
function opens an input method,
|
||||
matching the current locale and modifiers specification.
|
||||
Current locale and modifiers are bound to the input method at opening time.
|
||||
The locale associated with an input method cannot be changed dynamically.
|
||||
|
|
@ -103,11 +103,11 @@ for any input context affiliated with a given input method
|
|||
will be encoded in the locale current at the time the input method is opened.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The specific input method to which this call will be routed
|
||||
is identified on the basis of the current locale.
|
||||
is identified on the basis of the current locale.
|
||||
.B XOpenIM
|
||||
will identify a default input method corresponding to the
|
||||
current locale.
|
||||
That default can be modified using
|
||||
That default can be modified using
|
||||
.B XSetLocaleModifiers
|
||||
for the input method modifier.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ up values that can be set as IC values in an input context.
|
|||
If db is NULL,
|
||||
no database is passed to the input method.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name
|
||||
and class of the application.
|
||||
The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name
|
||||
and class of the application.
|
||||
They are intended to be used as prefixes by the input method
|
||||
when looking up resources that are common to all input contexts
|
||||
that may be created for this input method.
|
||||
|
|
@ -187,9 +187,9 @@ function registers a callback to be invoked whenever a new input method
|
|||
becomes available for the specified display that matches the current
|
||||
locale and modifiers.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The function returns
|
||||
The function returns
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns
|
||||
if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
|
|
@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ function removes an input method instantiation callback previously
|
|||
registered.
|
||||
The function returns
|
||||
.B True
|
||||
if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns
|
||||
if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns
|
||||
.BR False .
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
XCreateIC(__libmansuffix__),
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -52,17 +52,17 @@ XOpenOM, XCloseOM, XSetOMValues, XGetOMValues, XDisplayOfOM, XLocaleOfOM \- open
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XOM XOpenOM\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XrmDatabase \fIdb\fP\^, char
|
||||
*\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XCloseOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
Status XCloseOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XSetOMValues\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
char *XSetOMValues\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XGetOMValues\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
char *XGetOMValues\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Display *XDisplayOfOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
Display *XDisplayOfOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
char *XLocaleOfOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
char *XLocaleOfOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ is identified on the basis of the current locale and modifiers.
|
|||
.B XOpenOM
|
||||
will identify a default output method corresponding to the
|
||||
current locale.
|
||||
That default can be modified using
|
||||
That default can be modified using
|
||||
.B XSetLocaleModifiers
|
||||
to set the output method modifier.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -103,8 +103,8 @@ up values that can be set as OC values in an output context.
|
|||
If db is NULL,
|
||||
no database is passed to the output method.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name
|
||||
and class of the application.
|
||||
The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name
|
||||
and class of the application.
|
||||
They are intended to be used as prefixes by the output method
|
||||
when looking up resources that are common to all output contexts
|
||||
that may be created for this output method.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ XParseGeometry, XWMGeometry \- parse window geometry
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
int XParseGeometry\^(\^char *\fIparsestring\fP\^, int *\fIx_return\fP\^, int
|
||||
*\fIy_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
*\fIheight_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIheight_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XWMGeometry\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIscreen\fP\^, char
|
||||
*\fIuser_geom\fP\^, char *\fIdef_geom\fP\^, unsigned int \fIbwidth\fP\^,
|
||||
XSizeHints *\fIhints\fP\^, int *\fIx_return\fP, int *\fIy_return\fP\^, int
|
||||
*\fIwidth_return\fP\^, int *\fIheight_return\fP\^, int
|
||||
*\fIgravity_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIgravity_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIposition\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
|
|
@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Specifically, this function lets you parse strings of the form:
|
|||
.LP
|
||||
.\" Start marker code here
|
||||
.EX
|
||||
[=][<\fIwidth\fP>{xX}<\fIheight\fP>][{+-}<\fIxoffset\fP>{+-}<\fIyoffset\fP>]
|
||||
[=][<\fIwidth\fP>{xX}<\fIheight\fP>][{+-}<\fIxoffset\fP>{+-}<\fIyoffset\fP>]
|
||||
.EE
|
||||
.\" End marker code here
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ the result is implementation-dependent.
|
|||
The
|
||||
.B XParseGeometry
|
||||
function returns a bitmask that indicates which of the four values (width,
|
||||
height, xoffset, and yoffset) were actually found in the string
|
||||
and whether the x and y values are negative.
|
||||
height, xoffset, and yoffset) were actually found in the string
|
||||
and whether the x and y values are negative.
|
||||
By convention, \-0 is not equal to +0, because the user needs to
|
||||
be able to say \*(lqposition the window relative to the right or bottom edge.\*(rq
|
||||
For each value found, the corresponding argument is updated.
|
||||
|
|
@ -139,49 +139,49 @@ The bits are represented by
|
|||
.BR XNegative ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B YNegative
|
||||
and are defined in
|
||||
and are defined in
|
||||
.hN X11/Xutil.h .
|
||||
They will be set whenever one of the values is defined
|
||||
They will be set whenever one of the values is defined
|
||||
or one of the signs is set.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the function returns either the
|
||||
If the function returns either the
|
||||
.B XValue
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.B YValue
|
||||
flag,
|
||||
you should place the window at the requested position.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XWMGeometry
|
||||
function combines any geometry information (given in the format used by
|
||||
function combines any geometry information (given in the format used by
|
||||
.BR XParseGeometry )
|
||||
specified by the user and by the calling program with size hints
|
||||
(usually the ones to be stored in WM_NORMAL_HINTS) and returns the position,
|
||||
specified by the user and by the calling program with size hints
|
||||
(usually the ones to be stored in WM_NORMAL_HINTS) and returns the position,
|
||||
size, and gravity
|
||||
.Pn ( NorthWestGravity ,
|
||||
.Pn ( NorthWestGravity ,
|
||||
.BR NorthEastGravity ,
|
||||
.BR SouthEastGravity ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR SouthWestGravity )
|
||||
that describe the window.
|
||||
If the base size is not set in the
|
||||
If the base size is not set in the
|
||||
.B XSizeHints
|
||||
structure,
|
||||
structure,
|
||||
the minimum size is used if set.
|
||||
Otherwise, a base size of zero is assumed.
|
||||
If no minimum size is set in the hints structure,
|
||||
If no minimum size is set in the hints structure,
|
||||
the base size is used.
|
||||
A mask (in the form returned by
|
||||
A mask (in the form returned by
|
||||
.BR XParseGeometry )
|
||||
that describes which values came from the user specification
|
||||
that describes which values came from the user specification
|
||||
and whether or not the position coordinates are relative
|
||||
to the right and bottom edges is returned.
|
||||
Note that these coordinates will have already been accounted for
|
||||
Note that these coordinates will have already been accounted for
|
||||
in the x_return and y_return values.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Note that invalid geometry specifications can cause a width or height
|
||||
Note that invalid geometry specifications can cause a width or height
|
||||
of zero to be returned.
|
||||
The caller may pass the address of the hints win_gravity field
|
||||
The caller may pass the address of the hints win_gravity field
|
||||
as gravity_return to update the hints directly.
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
XSetWMProperties(__libmansuffix__)
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -51,18 +51,18 @@ XPolygonRegion, XClipBox \- generate regions
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Region XPolygonRegion\^(\^XPoint \fIpoints\fP[]\^, int \fIn\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIfill_rule\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIfill_rule\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XClipBox\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIrect_return\fP\^);
|
||||
int XClipBox\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIrect_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIfill_rule\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the fill-rule you want to set for the specified GC.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B EvenOddRule
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR WindingRule .
|
||||
.IP \fIn\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the number of points in the polygon.
|
||||
Specifies the number of points in the polygon.
|
||||
.IP \fIpoints\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies an array of points.
|
||||
.IP \fIr\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -88,12 +88,12 @@ but expanded from the 16-bit least-significant bits to a full 32-bit value.
|
|||
The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
|
||||
dispatchers.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The window member is set to the window whose associated
|
||||
The window member is set to the window whose associated
|
||||
property was changed.
|
||||
The atom member is set to the property's atom and indicates which
|
||||
property was changed or desired.
|
||||
The time member is set to the server time when the property was changed.
|
||||
The state member is set to indicate whether the property was changed
|
||||
The state member is set to indicate whether the property was changed
|
||||
to a new value or deleted and can be
|
||||
.B PropertyNewValue
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
|
@ -108,13 +108,13 @@ or
|
|||
.BR XChangeProperty )
|
||||
and when replacing all or part of a property with identical data using
|
||||
.B XChangeProperty
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR XRotateWindowProperties .
|
||||
The state member is set to
|
||||
.B PropertyDelete
|
||||
when a property of the window is deleted using
|
||||
.B XDeleteProperty
|
||||
or, if the delete argument is
|
||||
or, if the delete argument is
|
||||
.BR True ,
|
||||
.BR XGetWindowProperty .
|
||||
.SH "SEE ALSO"
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
|
|||
XPutBackEvent \- put events back on the queue
|
||||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XPutBackEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent\fP\^);
|
||||
XPutBackEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,30 +53,30 @@ XPutImage, XGetImage, XGetSubImage \- transfer images
|
|||
int XPutImage\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
|
||||
XImage *\fIimage\fP\^, int \fIsrc_x\fP\^, int \fIsrc_y\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIdest_x\fP\^, int \fIdest_y\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XImage *XGetImage\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^, unsigned long \fIplane_mask\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^);
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^, unsigned long \fIplane_mask\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
XImage *XGetSubImage\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, int
|
||||
\fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^, unsigned long \fIplane_mask\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^, XImage
|
||||
*\fIdest_image\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, \fIdest_y\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIdest_image\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, \fIdest_y\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fId\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
Specifies the drawable.
|
||||
.IP \fIdest_image\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the destination image.
|
||||
.ds Dx
|
||||
.ds Dx
|
||||
.IP \fIdest_x\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIdest_y\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the drawable
|
||||
and are the coordinates of the subimage
|
||||
or which are relative to the origin of the destination rectangle,
|
||||
specify its upper-left corner, and determine where the subimage
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the drawable
|
||||
and are the coordinates of the subimage
|
||||
or which are relative to the origin of the destination rectangle,
|
||||
specify its upper-left corner, and determine where the subimage
|
||||
is placed in the destination image.
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -84,45 +84,45 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
|||
Specifies the format for the image.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.B XYPixmap
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR ZPixmap .
|
||||
.IP \fIgc\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the GC.
|
||||
.IP \fIimage\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the image you want combined with the rectangle.
|
||||
Specifies the image you want combined with the rectangle.
|
||||
.IP \fIplane_mask\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the plane mask.
|
||||
.\" *** JIM: NEED MORE INFO FOR THIS. ***
|
||||
.IP \fIsrc_x\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the offset in X from the left edge of the image defined
|
||||
by the
|
||||
by the
|
||||
.B XImage
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.IP \fIsrc_y\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the offset in Y from the top edge of the image defined
|
||||
by the
|
||||
by the
|
||||
.B XImage
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
.IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIheight\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the width and height of the subimage, which define
|
||||
Specify the width and height of the subimage, which define
|
||||
the dimensions of the rectangle.
|
||||
.IP \fIx\fP 1i
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIy\fP 1i
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the drawable
|
||||
Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the drawable
|
||||
and define the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XPutImage
|
||||
function
|
||||
combines an image with a rectangle of the specified drawable.
|
||||
The section of the image defined by the src_x, src_y, width, and height
|
||||
The section of the image defined by the src_x, src_y, width, and height
|
||||
arguments is drawn on the specified part of the drawable.
|
||||
If
|
||||
If
|
||||
.B XYBitmap
|
||||
format is used, the depth of the image must be one,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,9 +130,9 @@ or a
|
|||
error results.
|
||||
The foreground pixel in the GC defines the source for the one bits in the image,
|
||||
and the background pixel defines the source for the zero bits.
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.B XYPixmap
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR ZPixmap ,
|
||||
the depth of the image must match the depth of the drawable,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
|
|
@ -145,8 +145,8 @@ differ from what the server requires,
|
|||
automatically makes the appropriate
|
||||
conversions.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
This function uses these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin,
|
||||
This function uses these GC components:
|
||||
function, plane-mask, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin,
|
||||
and clip-mask.
|
||||
It also uses these GC mode-dependent components:
|
||||
foreground and background.
|
||||
|
|
@ -167,16 +167,16 @@ function returns a pointer to an
|
|||
structure.
|
||||
This structure provides you with the contents of the specified rectangle of
|
||||
the drawable in the format you specify.
|
||||
If the format argument is
|
||||
If the format argument is
|
||||
.BR XYPixmap ,
|
||||
the image contains only the bit planes you passed to the plane_mask argument.
|
||||
If the plane_mask argument only requests a subset of the planes of the
|
||||
display, the depth of the returned image will be the number of planes
|
||||
requested.
|
||||
If the format argument is
|
||||
If the format argument is
|
||||
.BR ZPixmap ,
|
||||
.B XGetImage
|
||||
returns as zero the bits in all planes not
|
||||
returns as zero the bits in all planes not
|
||||
specified in the plane_mask argument.
|
||||
The function performs no range checking on the values in plane_mask and ignores
|
||||
extraneous bits.
|
||||
|
|
@ -186,17 +186,17 @@ returns the depth of the image to the depth member of the
|
|||
.B XImage
|
||||
structure.
|
||||
The depth of the image is as specified when the drawable was created,
|
||||
except when getting a subset of the planes in
|
||||
except when getting a subset of the planes in
|
||||
.B XYPixmap
|
||||
format, when the depth is given by the number of bits set to 1 in plane_mask.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If the drawable is a pixmap,
|
||||
the given rectangle must be wholly contained within the pixmap,
|
||||
If the drawable is a pixmap,
|
||||
the given rectangle must be wholly contained within the pixmap,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If the drawable is a window,
|
||||
the window must be viewable,
|
||||
If the drawable is a window,
|
||||
the window must be viewable,
|
||||
and it must be the case that if there were no inferiors or overlapping windows,
|
||||
the specified rectangle of the window would be fully visible on the screen
|
||||
and wholly contained within the outside edges of the window,
|
||||
|
|
@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Note that the borders of the window can be included and read with
|
|||
this request.
|
||||
If the window has backing-store, the backing-store contents are
|
||||
returned for regions of the window that are obscured by noninferior
|
||||
windows.
|
||||
windows.
|
||||
If the window does not have backing-store,
|
||||
the returned contents of such obscured regions are undefined.
|
||||
The returned contents of visible regions of inferiors
|
||||
|
|
@ -225,17 +225,17 @@ and
|
|||
.B BadValue
|
||||
errors.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XGetSubImage
|
||||
function updates dest_image with the specified subimage in the same manner as
|
||||
function updates dest_image with the specified subimage in the same manner as
|
||||
.BR XGetImage .
|
||||
If the format argument is
|
||||
If the format argument is
|
||||
.BR XYPixmap ,
|
||||
the image contains only the bit planes you passed to the plane_mask argument.
|
||||
If the format argument is
|
||||
If the format argument is
|
||||
.BR ZPixmap ,
|
||||
.B XGetSubImage
|
||||
returns as zero the bits in all planes not
|
||||
returns as zero the bits in all planes not
|
||||
specified in the plane_mask argument.
|
||||
The function performs no range checking on the values in plane_mask and ignores
|
||||
extraneous bits.
|
||||
|
|
@ -255,18 +255,18 @@ the given rectangle must be wholly contained within the pixmap,
|
|||
or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If the drawable is a window,
|
||||
the window must be viewable,
|
||||
If the drawable is a window,
|
||||
the window must be viewable,
|
||||
and it must be the case that if there were no inferiors or overlapping windows,
|
||||
the specified rectangle of the window would be fully visible on the screen
|
||||
and wholly contained within the outside edges of the window,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
If the window has backing-store,
|
||||
then the backing-store contents are returned for regions of the window
|
||||
that are obscured by noninferior windows.
|
||||
If the window does not have backing-store,
|
||||
If the window has backing-store,
|
||||
then the backing-store contents are returned for regions of the window
|
||||
that are obscured by noninferior windows.
|
||||
If the window does not have backing-store,
|
||||
the returned contents of such obscured regions are undefined.
|
||||
The returned contents of visible regions of inferiors
|
||||
of a different depth than the specified window's depth are also undefined.
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ XQueryBestSize, XQueryBestTile, XQueryBestStipple \- determine efficient sizes
|
|||
Status XQueryBestSize\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIclass\fP\^,
|
||||
Drawable \fIwhich_screen\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int
|
||||
\fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int
|
||||
*\fIheight_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIheight_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XQueryBestTile\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable
|
||||
\fIwhich_screen\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^,
|
||||
|
|
@ -61,14 +61,14 @@ unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^);
|
|||
.HP
|
||||
Status XQueryBestStipple\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable
|
||||
\fIwhich_screen\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^,
|
||||
unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^);
|
||||
unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIclass\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the class that you are interested in.
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
You can pass
|
||||
.BR TileShape ,
|
||||
.BR CursorShape ,
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR StippleShape .
|
||||
.IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
||||
|
|
@ -83,35 +83,35 @@ Specifies any drawable on the screen.
|
|||
.br
|
||||
.ns
|
||||
.IP \fIheight_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Return the width and height of the object best supported
|
||||
Return the width and height of the object best supported
|
||||
by the display hardware.
|
||||
.SH DESCRIPTION
|
||||
The
|
||||
.B XQueryBestSize
|
||||
function returns the best or closest size to the specified size.
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR CursorShape ,
|
||||
this is the largest size that can be fully displayed on the screen specified by
|
||||
which_screen.
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR TileShape ,
|
||||
this is the size that can be tiled fastest.
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR StippleShape ,
|
||||
this is the size that can be stippled fastest.
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.BR CursorShape ,
|
||||
the drawable indicates the desired screen.
|
||||
For
|
||||
For
|
||||
.B TileShape
|
||||
and
|
||||
and
|
||||
.BR StippleShape ,
|
||||
the drawable indicates the screen and possibly the window class and depth.
|
||||
An
|
||||
An
|
||||
.B InputOnly
|
||||
window cannot be used as the drawable for
|
||||
window cannot be used as the drawable for
|
||||
.B TileShape
|
||||
or
|
||||
or
|
||||
.BR StippleShape ,
|
||||
or a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
|
|
@ -130,9 +130,9 @@ The
|
|||
function returns the best or closest size, that is, the size that can be
|
||||
tiled fastest on the screen specified by which_screen.
|
||||
The drawable indicates the screen and possibly the window class and depth.
|
||||
If an
|
||||
If an
|
||||
.B InputOnly
|
||||
window is used as the drawable, a
|
||||
window is used as the drawable, a
|
||||
.B BadMatch
|
||||
error results.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
|
|
@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
|
|||
.\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
|
||||
.\" of this documentation for any purpose.
|
||||
.\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.\"
|
||||
.ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
|
||||
.ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
|
||||
|
|
@ -52,22 +52,22 @@ XQueryColor, XQueryColors, XLookupColor, XParseColor \- obtain color values
|
|||
.SH SYNTAX
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XQueryColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^, XColor
|
||||
*\fIdef_in_out\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIdef_in_out\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
int XQueryColors\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
|
||||
XColor \fIdefs_in_out\fP[\^]\^, int \fIncolors\fP\^);
|
||||
XColor \fIdefs_in_out\fP[\^]\^, int \fIncolors\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XLookupColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
|
||||
char *\fIcolor_name\fP\^, XColor *\fIexact_def_return\fP\^, XColor
|
||||
*\fIscreen_def_return\fP\^);
|
||||
*\fIscreen_def_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.HP
|
||||
Status XParseColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
|
||||
char *\fIspec\fP\^, XColor *\fIexact_def_return\fP\^);
|
||||
char *\fIspec\fP\^, XColor *\fIexact_def_return\fP\^);
|
||||
.SH ARGUMENTS
|
||||
.IP \fIcolormap\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the colormap.
|
||||
.IP \fIcolor_name\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color
|
||||
Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color
|
||||
definition structure you want returned.
|
||||
.IP \fIdef_in_out\fP 1i
|
||||
Specifies and returns the RGB values for the pixel specified in the structure.
|
||||
|
|
@ -79,8 +79,8 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
|
|||
.IP \fIexact_def_return\fP 1i
|
||||
Returns the exact RGB values.
|
||||
.IP \fIncolors\fP 1i
|
||||
.\"Specifies the number of color definition structures.
|
||||
Specifies the number of
|
||||
.\"Specifies the number of color definition structures.
|
||||
Specifies the number of
|
||||
.B XColor
|
||||
structures in the color definition array.
|
||||
.IP \fIscreen_def_return\fP 1i
|
||||
|
|
@ -132,9 +132,9 @@ The
|
|||
function looks up the string name of a color with respect to the screen
|
||||
associated with the specified colormap.
|
||||
It returns both the exact color values and
|
||||
the closest values provided by the screen
|
||||
the closest values provided by the screen
|
||||
with respect to the visual type of the specified colormap.
|
||||
If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
|
||||
If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
|
||||
the result is implementation-dependent.
|
||||
Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
|
||||
.B XLookupColor
|
||||
|
|
@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ The
|
|||
function looks up the string name of a color with respect to the screen
|
||||
associated with the specified colormap.
|
||||
It returns the exact color value.
|
||||
If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
|
||||
If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
|
||||
the result is implementation-dependent.
|
||||
Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
|
||||
.B XParseColor
|
||||
|
|
@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ rgb:\fI<red>/<green>/<blue>\fP
|
|||
.EE
|
||||
.\" End marker code here
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Note that \fIh\fP indicates the value scaled in 4 bits,
|
||||
Note that \fIh\fP indicates the value scaled in 4 bits,
|
||||
\fIhh\fP the value scaled in 8 bits,
|
||||
\fIhhh\fP the value scaled in 12 bits,
|
||||
and \fIhhhh\fP the value scaled in 16 bits, respectively.
|
||||
|
|
@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ l l.
|
|||
.TE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The R, G, and B represent single hexadecimal digits.
|
||||
When fewer than 16 bits each are specified,
|
||||
When fewer than 16 bits each are specified,
|
||||
they represent the most significant bits of the value
|
||||
(unlike the \*(lqrgb:\*(rq syntax, in which values are scaled).
|
||||
For example, the string \*(lq#3a7\*(rq is the same as \*(lq#3000a0007000\*(rq.
|
||||
|
|
@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Note that red, green, and blue are floating-point values
|
|||
between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive.
|
||||
The input format for these values is an optional sign,
|
||||
a string of numbers possibly containing a decimal point,
|
||||
and an optional exponent field containing an E or e
|
||||
and an optional exponent field containing an E or e
|
||||
followed by a possibly signed integer string.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The standard device-independent string specifications have
|
||||
|
|
|
|||
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show more
Loading…
Add table
Reference in a new issue